Menu

Revelation 21:12 — Word Study

Depth

N1904ἔχουσα τε τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τὰ ὀνόματα τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

BSAhavingechō then a wallteichos [a strong barrier, a fence] greatmegas [and lofty, extremely high] andkai high,hupsēlos [elevated, towering above] havingechō gatespulōn [entrances, doorways] twelvedōdeka andkai atepi theho gatespulōn [entrances, doorways] angelsangelos [messengers, heavenly beings] twelve,dōdeka andkai namesonoma [identities, designations] inscribed,epigraphō [written, engraved] whichhos, hē areeimi the namesonoma of theho twelvedōdeka tribesphulē [family groups, clans] of theho of [the] sonsuhios of Israel;Israēl [God's chosen people, the descendants of Jacob]

Word
Listen & take awayRevelation 21
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 12 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (Israēl) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Revelation 21:12quick helps
In a sentenceThe city has a magnificent wall with twelve gates, each bearing the names of the twelve tribes of Israel and attended by angels.
Who is speakingThe Apostle John, describing the New Jerusalem.
Where we areIn a vision of the new heaven and new earth, specifically the description of the New Jerusalem.
The hard wordἔχουσα
Take awayThe gates of the city are significant, representing the tribes of Israel.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectἔχω verbἔχω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Revelation 21:12

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The New Jerusalemgenerated

11shining with the glory of God. Its radiance was like a most precious jewel, like a jasper, as clear as crystal.
12The city had a great and high wall with twelve gates inscribed with the names of the twelve tribes of Israel, and twelve angels at the gates.
13There were three gates on the east, three on the north, three on the south, and three on the west.
14The wall of the city had twelve foundations bearing the names of the twelve apostles of the Lamb.

Revelation 21:12 describes the New Jerusalem, a city that symbolizes the ultimate fulfillment of God's promise to His people. This city, radiant with God's glory, features a great wall and twelve gates, each named after the tribes of Israel. The presence of angels at the gates signifies divine protection and the importance of the tribes in God's plan, echoing themes found throughout the Old Testament.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Revelation 21:17–20And he measured its wall to be 144 cubits, by the human measure the angel was using.
2Ezra 9:9Though we are slaves, our God has not forsaken us in our bondage, but He has extended to us grace in the sight of the kings of Persia, giving us new life to rebuild the house of our God and repair its ruins, and giving us a wall of protection in Judah and Jerusalem.
3Nehemiah 12:27At the dedication of the wall of Jerusalem, the Levites were sought out from all their homes and brought to Jerusalem to celebrate the joyous dedication with thanksgiving and singing, accompanied by cymbals, harps, and lyres.
4Psalm 51:18In Your good pleasure, cause Zion to prosper; build up the walls of Jerusalem.
5Psalm 122:7May there be peace within your walls, and prosperity inside your fortresses.”

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 16 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἔχουσα, echōgenerated

The verb ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold'. It indicates possession and is often used in various contexts, such as having authority or being in a state of being.

In this verse, it describes the city as possessing a wall, emphasizing the city's strength and fortification. The present active participle form indicates that this is a continuous state of having, which enhances the description of the city.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as 'The city had a great and high wall with twelve gates inscribed with the names of the twelve tribes of Israel, and twelve angels at the gates.' Other translations like the KJV and ASV also maintain a similar structure, emphasizing the wall and gates.

Where translations differ is in the rendering of ἔχουσα, with the BSB and BBE using 'had', while others like the ASV opt for 'having'. The word ἀγγέλους is consistently translated as 'angels' across most versions, but YLT uses 'messengers'.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb ἔχουσα, having, governs the entire verse, describing the state of the city. It is followed by a noun phrase that specifies what the city has, which is a wall, and additional phrases that describe the wall and its gates.

The structure includes several clauses that elaborate on the characteristics of the wall and gates, with the participial phrase ἐπιγεγραμμένα providing detail about the names inscribed on the gates.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

τεῖχος corresponds to the Hebrew word חוֹמָה (H2346), which means 'wall' and is often used in the context of fortifications in the Old Testament, indicating protection.

δώδεκα translates the Hebrew for 'twelve', emphasizing the significance of this number in the context of the tribes of Israel.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Revelation 21:12 describes the New Jerusalem, a city with a strong wall and twelve gates named after the tribes of Israel. Each gate has an angel, highlighting the city's divine protection and the importance of the tribes in God's plan.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does the wall represent?

The wall represents the strength and protection of the New Jerusalem, emphasizing God's safeguarding of His people.

Why are there twelve gates?

The twelve gates represent the twelve tribes of Israel, signifying their foundational role in God's covenant with His people.

What is the significance of the angels at the gates?

The angels at the gates symbolize divine guardianship and the connection between heaven and earth, ensuring that only those who belong to God's people may enter.

How does this verse connect to the Old Testament?

This verse connects to the Old Testament by referencing the twelve tribes of Israel, which are central to God's covenant and promises throughout Scripture.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How does the imagery of the New Jerusalem inspire you in your faith journey?
  2. What does the presence of the twelve tribes at the gates signify about God's relationship with His people?
  3. In what ways can you reflect the protection and strength of God in your own life?
  4. How can understanding the significance of the gates deepen your appreciation for God's promises?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church Fathers comment on the significance of the New Jerusalem, drawing connections between the gates and the apostles, as well as the divine nature of the city's light.

Victorinus of PettauCommentary on the Apocalypse of the Blessed John d. c. 304
And in that he says that the sun is not necessary in the city, he shows, evidently, that the Creator as the immaculate light shines in the midst of it, whose brightness no mind has been able to conceive, nor tongue to tell.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →
Caesarius of ArlesEXPOSITION ON THE APOCALYPSE 21:12, HOMILY 19 c. 470–542
The twelve gates and the twelve angels are the apostles and the prophets, for as it is written, we “are built upon the foundation of the apostles and the prophets.” The Lord also spoke in a similar way to Peter: “Upon this rock I shall…
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →
Primasius of HadrumetumCOMMENTARY ON THE APOCALYPSE 21:12 d. c. 560
The wall of the church is Christ, and we read [that this wall] is both great and high: “Great is the Lord and greatly to be praised in the city of our God,
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Revelation 21:12 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And had a wall great and high,.... Not the Spirit of God, who separates, sanctifies, and preserves the saints, as Cocceius thinks, for this account respects not the church militant; nor the eternal

Read John Gill on Revelation 21 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And had a wall great and high, and had twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels, and names written thereon, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel: And. 'Aleph (') A B omit.

Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 21 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

And had a wall, that is, this city, by which is meant the church of God, had a wall great and high. Walls are for the protection and defence of a place; the higher and greater they are, the greater defence and protection they give. By this God is meant, who is often called his people’ s Rock and Defence. And had twelve gates: the use of the gates of a city, are to let persons in and out. The church is said to have twelve gates, because of the free liberty of access to the church while it was militant, and to signify that the church in heaven will be made up of persons come into it from all parts; or for the greater state and glory of it. Some think, because of the twelve apostles, who were…

Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 21 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

12 And had a wall great and high, and had twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels, and names written thereon, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel: Ver. 12. And had a wall] Far better than that of Babylon. Indeed this celestial China needs no wall to divide it from the Tartars; this is Arabia Felix, the people whereof live in security, and fear no enemy. They are in a far happier condition than the people of Tombutum in Africa, which are said to spend their whole time in singing and dancing. And had twelve gates] Thebes had a hundred gates, and was therefore called εκατομτυλος, but nothing so well set and so commodious for passengers as this city with…

Read John Trapp on Revelation 21 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(12, 13) And had a wall great and high . . .—Or, better (for the construction is continued), Having a wall great and high, and having twelve gate-towers, and at the gate-towers twelve angels, and names inscribed which are (names) of the twelve tribes of the sons of Israel: from the sun-rising (i.e., facing east) three gate-towers; from the north three gate-towers, from the south three gate-towers; from the sun-setting three gate-towers. On this arrangement of gates Numbers 2, Ezekiel 48, and Revelation 7 should be compared. In the encampment in the wilderness (Numbers 2) the tribes were arranged as follows: on the east, Judah, Issachar, Zebulun; on the south, Reuben, Simeon, Gad; on the…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 21 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 12. Had a wall great and high] An almighty defense. Twelve gates] A gate for every tribe of Israel, in the vicinity of which gate that tribe dwelt; so that in coming in and going out they did not mix with each other. This description of the city is partly taken from Ezekiel 48:30-35. In Synopsis Sohar, p. 115, n. 27, it is said: "In the palace of the world to come there are twelve gates, each of which is inscribed with one of the twelve tribes, as that of Reuben, of Simeon, c.: he, therefore, who is of the tribe of Reuben is received into none of the twelve gates but his own and so of the rest."

Read AdamClarke on Revelation 21 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

12. and had] Lit. having; but there is a break in the construction, at least as marked as that given by the A. V.a wall great and high] Its exact height is stated in Revelation 21:17.twelve gates … Israel] So Ezekiel 48:31-34. Probably the order of the names on the gates would be the same as there; but the order can hardly be pressed as important, since it is quite different from that of the foursquare encampment in the wilderness, Numbers 2. The 12 gates of heaven in Enoch xxxiii–xxxv. do not really present a very close parallel to these.twelve angels] As porters and sentinels. Such officers are in keeping with the image of a well-ordered city, though in fact neither they, nor walls and…

Read Cambridge on Revelation 21 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And had a wall great and high - Ancient cities were always surrounded with walls for protection, and John represents this as enclosed in the usual manner. The word “great” means that it was thick and strong.

Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 21 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

The city had a great and high wall with twelve gates inscribed with the names of the twelve tribes of Israel, and twelve angels at the gates.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

having a great and high wall with twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels, and names written on them, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

The city had a great and high wall with twelve gates inscribed with the names of the twelve tribes of Israel, and twelve angels at the gates.

NETBNew English Translation2006

It has a massive, high wall with twelve gates, with twelve angels at the gates, and the names of the twelve tribes of the nation of Israel are written on the gates.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And had a wall great and high, and had twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels, and names written thereon, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel:

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

having a wall great and high; having twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels; and names written thereon, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel:

RVARevised Version, American1894

having a wall great and high; having twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels; and names written thereon, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel:

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And had a wall great and high, and had twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels, and names written on them, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And had a great wall and hie, and had twelue gates, and at the gates twelue Angels, and the names written, which are the twelue tribes of the children of Israel.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

having a great and high wall; having twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels, and names inscribed, which are those of the twelve tribes of [the] sons of Israel.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

having also a wall great and high, having twelve gates, and at the gates twelve messengers, and names written thereon, which are [those] of the twelve tribes of the sons of Israel,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

also having a great and high wall, having twelve gates, and at the gates twelve messengers, and names written thereon, which are [those] of the twelve tribes of the sons of Israel—

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

It had a great, high wall with twelve gates, with twelve angels at the gates. On the gates were written the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And it had a wall great and high, having twelve gates, and in the gates twelve angels, and names written thereon, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

The city wall was high and thick, with twelve gates guarded by twelve angels. On the gates were inscribed the names of the twelve tribes of Israel.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

She had a wall great and high, with twelve doors, and at the doors twelve angels; and names on them, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἔχουσαechō having G2192 3 different renderings
hadBBE BSB GNV KJV MSB NWB ULB
havingASV DBY DRA LSV RVA WEB YLT
hasNETB
τεῖχοςteichos a wall G5038 2 different renderings
wallBSB DBY FBV GNV LSV MSB NETB ULB WEB
a wallASV BBE DRA KJV NWB RVA YLT
ἔχουσαechō having G2192 3 different renderings
hadBBE BSB GNV KJV MSB NWB ULB
havingASV DBY DRA LSV RVA WEB YLT
hasNETB
ἀγγέλουςangelos angels G32 2 different renderings
angelsASV BBE BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
messengersLSV YLT
ἐπιγεγραμμένα,epigraphō inscribed, G1924 2 different renderings
writtenASV DRA GNV KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
inscribedBSB DBY FBV MSB
ἐστινeimi are G1510 2 different renderings
areASV BBE DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA WEB YLT
wereFBV ULB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseverbἔχουσαhavingnoun phrase · objectτεῖχοςa walladjective phraseμέγαgreatκαὶandὑψηλόνhighclauseclauseverbἔχουσαhavingnoun phrase · objectπυλῶναςgatesδώδεκαtwelveκαὶandclauseclauseprepositional phrase · predicateἐπὶatnoun phraseτοῖςtheπυλῶσινgatesnoun phrase · subjectἀγγέλουςangelsδώδεκαtwelveκαὶandclauseverbἐπιγεγραμμέναhaving been inscribednoun phrase · subjectὀνόματαnamesclausesubjectwhichlinking verbἐστινarenoun phrase · predicateτῶνof thenoun phraseδώδεκαtwelvenoun phraseφυλῶνtribesnoun phraseυἱῶνof [the] sonsἸσραήλof Israel

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et habebat murum magnum, et altum, habentem portas duodecim : et in portis angelos duodecim, et nomina inscripta, quæ sunt nomina duodecim tribuum filiorum Israël :

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܐܝܬ ܠܗ ܫܘܪܐ ܪܒܐ ܘܪܡܐ ܘܐܝܬ ܠܗ ܬܪܥܐ ܬܪܥܣܪ ܘܥܠ ܬܪܥܐ ܡܠܐܟܐ ܬܪܥܣܪ ܘܫܡܗܝܗܘܢ ܟܬܝܒܐ ܐܝܠܝܢ ܕܐܝܬܝܗܘܢ ܫܡܗܐ ܕܬܪܥܣܪ ܫܒܛܐ ܕܐܝܣܪܝܠ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἔχουσα τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τὰ ὀνόματα τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἔχουσα τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τὰ ὀνόματα τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

ἔχουσα τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

ἔχουσα τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

ἔχουσα τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τὰ ὀνόματα τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

ἔχουσα τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τὰ ὀνόματα τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

ἔχουσα τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, ἔχουσα πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν ὀνόματα τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

ἔχουσα τε τεῖχος μέγα καὶ ὑψηλόν, πυλῶνας δώδεκα καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς πυλῶσιν ἀγγέλους δώδεκα, καὶ ὀνόματα ἐπιγεγραμμένα, ἐστιν τῶν δώδεκα φυλῶν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ·

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
τε thenTRNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, Byz
ἔχουσα havingNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, ByzTR
τοῖς theNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TR, ByzTreg
πυλῶσιν gatesNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TR, ByzTreg
τὰ theNA28, NA27, Tyn, TregSBL, WH, TR, Byz
ὀνόματα namesNA28, NA27, Tyn, Treg, ByzSBL, WH, TR
τῶν of theTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Revelation 21:12ἔχωhavinghavingἔχωτέthenthenτέτεῖχοςa walla wallτεῖχοςμέγαςgreatgreatμέγαςκαίandandκαίὑψηλόςhigh,high,ὑψηλόςἔχωhavinghavingἔχωπυλώνgatesgatesπυλώνδώδεκαtwelvetwelveδώδεκακαίandandκαίἐπίatatἐπίthetheπυλώνgatesgatesπυλώνἄγγελοςangelsangelsἄγγελοςδώδεκαtwelve,twelve,δώδεκακαίandandκαίὄνομαnamesnamesὄνομαἐπιγράφωinscribed,inscribed,ἐπιγράφωὅςwhichwhichὅςεἰμίareareεἰμίthetheὄνομαnamesnamesὄνομαof theof theδώδεκαtwelvetwelveδώδεκαφυλήtribestribesφυλήof theof theυἱόςof [the] soof [the] sonsυἱόςἸσραήλof Israel;of Israel;ἸσραήλδύοAdj. & IndAdj. & Indec.nuδύοπύληn.f. a doon.f. a door, gaπύληὕψοςn.n. heighn.n. height, heὕψοςἄγωv. I leadv. I leadἄγωγινώσκωv. I come v. I come to knγινώσκωὀνίνημιv. I help,v. I help, profὀνίνημιἐπίPrep. on, Prep. on, to, aἐπίφύωv. I grow,v. I grow, growφύωκαίCj. and, eCj. and, even, καίτίκτωv. I bear,v. I bear, brinτίκτωArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗφυλήn.f. a trin.f. a tribe, rφυλήχιλιάςn.f. a thon.f. a thousandχιλιάςχρείαn.f. need,n.f. need, neceχρείακακῶςAdv badly,Adv badly, evilκακῶςτρεῖςAdj threeAdj threeτρεῖςδώδεκαIndec.num.Indec.num. twelδώδεκα
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Revelation 21:12

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ἔχουσαechō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · feminine
709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.
Tyndale gloss
to have/be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NSF — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%having
having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
μήNeg
Article theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep
ὅς
καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist
χρείαneed, necessity, bus
οὐNegαὐτόςὅς
ἔχωhaving709×
what comes after →
Article the
ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegὅς
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me
οὖςthe ear
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we
Article theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
τε then G5037
209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A conjunction meaning and or both, used to connect words or ideas closely. Found in Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33, it shows a strong link between things.
Tyndale gloss
and/both
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τέ (te) is an enclitic copulative particle that functions similarly to the Latin '-que' and is used to denote a closer connection than the more general καί (kai). It appears primarily in the New Testament, especially in the book of Acts, and can mean 'and,' 'both,' or 'also.' Notably, it is used in verses like Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = et, ac, atque), not very freq. in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac.

τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (Bl., §77, 8): Mt 28:12, Jo 4:42, Ac 2:33, 37, 40 10:22 11:21, al.

Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Ac 26:16 Ro 14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Lk 12:45, Ac 1:1 15:9 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with καί, ef. Curtius $§ 27, 647; Vaniéek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. § 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of which ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times; nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baéumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ marks it as…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τε (te) — and/both.

τε,

enclitic Particle, with two main uses (see. infr. A, B).

__A as a Conjunction,

__A.I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usually short in [Refs 8th c.BC+], longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ᾽ ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ᾽ ἀδικήσαντες κατ᾽ ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+], compare 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (which see); τε may be used three or more times…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέ

te

a primary particle (enclitic) of connection or addition; both or also

(properly, as correlation of 2532):--also, and, both, even, then,

whether. Often used in composition, usually as the latter participle.

see GREEK for 2532

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέ

Disj.prt.

and, both

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τε te 215x

enclitic, can function as a conj., serving either as a lightly-appending link, Acts 1:15; and, Acts 2:3; or as an inclusive prefix, Lk. 12:45; both, Lk. 24:20; Acts 26:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%then
then37% · 84×both35% · 79×and14% · 32×also11% · 26×other renderings3% · 6×

227 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject20%adverbial19%object13%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀνευρίσκωI find by seekinδιαγογγύζωI murmur greatlyφίλος
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πιστεύωI believe, have κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπᾶςall, the whole,
λέγωI say, speak
καρδίαthe heart, innerφυλακήa watching, guarθεόςGod, a god
πολύςmuch, many, often
σφόδραexceedingly, greἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemαὐτός
ἐν
ἐγώμάρτυςa witnessποιέωI do, make
τέthen209×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Ἕλληνa Hellene, a Greγυνήa woman, wife, mArticle the
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulχώραregion, land, fiπόλιςa city
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakπεριαστράπτωI flash around l
πρός
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
γάρfor
θῆλυςfemaleἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagernesζάωI live

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέ · 209× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians John Matthew 2 Corinthians James Ephesians Jude Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
τεῖχοςteichos a wall G5038 Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Refers to a wall, especially one surrounding a town, like the wall in Acts 9:25 where Paul escaped. Also appears in Revelation 21:12-19, describing the wall of the new Jerusalem.
Amplified meaning
a strong barrier, a fence
Tyndale gloss
wall
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τεῖχος is a neuter noun meaning 'wall,' particularly a wall surrounding a city. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as Acts 9:25 and Revelation 21:12. The term can also refer to fortifications or a fortified town. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τεῖχος, -ους, τό

[in LXX chiefly for חוֹמָה ;]

a wall, esp. that about a town: Ac 9:25, II Co 11:33, He 11:30, Re 21:12-19

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τεῖχος, -ovs, τό, [ef. θιγγάνω; allied with it are Eng. ‘dike’ and ‘ditch ᾽], fr. Hom. down, Sept. very freq. for main ‘wall’; the wall round a city, town-wall: Acts ix. 25; 2 Co. xi. 33; Heb. xi. 30; Rev. xxi. 12, 14 sq., 17-19.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τεῖχος, “a wall,”’ especially the wall about a city (Ac 958 αἰ}: ef. P Eleph 20°? (iii/B.c.) παστοφόριον ἐν Tevriper ἐντὸς τείχους, P Ryl II. 12715 (a.p. 29) τὸ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τεῖχος τοῦ xovs, P Flor I. 50 (a.p. 268) év[rds τειχῶν] καὶ ἐκτός, cf.36. 80, and P Strass I. 98 (¢ A.D. 307 or 352) θεμελίοις καὶ τίχεσιν. For the dim. τειχίον see CPR I. 2321 (ii/iii A.D.) μέϊσο]ν [ὄντος τειχί[ου, and for the form τειχάριον (not in 1.55), see P Ryl II, 1257 (A.p. 28-9) κατασπασμὸν τειχαρίων

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τεῖχος (teichos) — wall.

τεῖχος, εος, τό,

wall, especially city-wall, Ἰλιόφι κλυτὰ τείχεα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the embankment round the ships, τάφρος Δαναῶν καὶ τ. ὕπερθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Κιμμέρια τ. earthworks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ξύλινον τεῖχος exceptionally, Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses this phrase for a funeral pile, “P.” 3.38); τ. χάλκεον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τ. σιδηροῦν, τείχη χαλκᾶ καὶ ἀδαμάντινα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τειχέων κιθῶνες coats of walls, i.e. walls one within the other, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τεῖχος ἐλαύνειν, see at {ἐλαύνω} [Refs 8th c.BC+] to build oneself walls, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. περιβαλέσθαι build walls round one's city, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —hence _passive_, τεῖχος περιβεβλημένος having a wall round it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τείχη περιβεβλημένοι, of citizens, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but also νῆσον περιβάλλεσθαι τείχει surround one's island with…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τεῖχος

teichos

akin to the base of 5088; a wall (as formative of a house):--wall.

see GREEK for 5088

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τεῖχος, ους, τό

n.n.

a wall

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τεῖχος teichos 9x

a wall of a city, Acts 9:25; 2 Cor. 11:33; Heb. 11:30; Rev. 21:12, 14f., 17-19*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τεῖχος τεῖχος, ος, εος, τό, a wall, esp. a wall round a city, town-wall, in sg. and pl., Hom.; τειχέων κιθῶνες coats of walls, i. e. walls one within the other, Hdt.; τεῖχος ἐλαύνειν, δέμειν Il., etc.; οἰκοδομεῖν Hdt.; τ. περιβάλλεσθαι moenia sibi circumdare, id. Hdt.; also, τ. περιβάλλεσθαι τὴν πόλιν id. Hdt.; τ. ῥήξασθαι to breach the wall, Il.; so in Prose, τ. καθαιρεῖν, κατασκάπτειν Hdt., etc.

τὰ μακρὰ τείχη at Athens were lines of wall connecting the city-wall with the harbours, called respectively τὸ βόρειον or Peiraic, and τὸ νότιον or Phaleric wall.— τεῖχος, τείχη differ from τοῖχος, as Lat. murus, moenia from paries, city-walls from a house-wall; cf. τειχίον.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASN — Noun · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wol.

See ARCHITECTURE; CITY; FORTIFICATION; HOUSE; JERUSALEM; VILLAGE.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Wall

Cities were surrounded by walls, as distinguished from “unwalled villages” (Ezek. 38:11; Lev. 25:29-34). They were made thick and strong (Num. 13:28; Deut. 3:5). Among the Jews walls were built of stone, some of those in the temple being of great size (1 Kings 6:7; 7:9-12; 20:30; Mark 13:1, 2). The term is used metaphorically of security and safety (Isa. 26:1; 60:18; Rev. 21:12-20). (See FENCE.)

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%wall
wall89% · 8×walls11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject44%object33%adverbial22%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
διάκαίand, even, also,πίστιςfaith, belief, t
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
τεῖχοςa wall
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἑκατόνIndecἴασπιςjasper
Article the
πόλιςa city
καθίημιI let down
αὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐκφεύγωI flee out, away
ἸεριχώProp
πίπτωI fall, fall und

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτεῖχος · 9× in the New Testament
Revelation 2 Corinthians Acts Hebrews
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 65 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.75c. AD 40

κύκλον δὲ περιτίθησι καὶ ὡσανεὶ τεῖχος ἡ φρόνησις τῇ Εὐιλὰτ τῇ ὠδινούσῃ ἀφροσύνῃ πρὸς πολιορκίαν αὐτῆς καὶ καθαίρεσιν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.203c. AD 75–95

τόν τε γὰρ ποταμὸν εἰς διώρυχας αὐτοῖς πολλὰς προσέταξαν διατεμεῖν τείχη τε οἰκοδομῆσαι ταῖς πόλεσι καὶ χώματα, ὅπως ἂν εἴργοι τὸν ποταμὸν μὴ λιμνάζειν ἐπεκβαίνοντα, πυραμίδας τε ἀνοικοδομοῦντες ἐξετρύχουν ἡμῶν τὸ γένος, ὡς τέχνας τε παντοίας…

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 25.2.5c. AD 140

μετὰ τὸ ταῦτα τελέσαι τὸν ἄγγελον λέγει τῷ ποιμένι: Ἐγὼ ὑπάγω: σὺ δὲ τούτους ἀπολύσεις εἰς τὰ τείχη, καθὼς ἄξιός ἐστί τις κατοικεῖν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Ryl. 2 127Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 29

ἐν τῷ ἐποικίωι ἐπιβαλόντες τινὲς λῃστρικῶι τρόπωι ὑπώρυξαν διὰ τοῦ ζυτοπωλίου τὸ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τεῖχος τοῦ οἴκου καὶ ἔνδον γενόμενοι ἤροσαν τῶν ἐμῶν ὧν τὸ καθʼ ἓν ὑπόκειται, καθυπονοῶ

εὐθέως δὲ κομισάμενος τὴν ἐπιστολὴν πορεύου ἐπὶ τὸν τροχὸν χὸν καὶ κατάσπασον ὅλον τὸ τεῖχος καὶ τὰς μηχανὰς μετάθες εἰς τὸν … ον τόπον. τὰ ἄλλα τοῦ ὑγιαίνειν ἐπιμέλου.

P.Oxy. 49 3467OxyrhynchosAD 98

ρ … … νος λῃστρικῷ τρόπῳ διορύξαντές τινες τὸ ἐν τῇ δημοσίᾳ ῥύμῃ τεῖχος τῆς αὐλῆς καὶ εἰσελθόντες ἀπήλασάν μου πρόβατα ὀκτώ . ἐπιζητοῦντος δέ μου ταῦτα, εὗρον

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
μέγαmegas great G3173 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
243× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for great, describing something big or intense, like a large stone in Matthew 2:60 or a strong wind in John 6:18. It's used to show importance or magnitude. In the Bible, it's often used to describe God's power and love.
Amplified meaning
and lofty, extremely high
Tyndale gloss
great
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μέγας is an adjective meaning 'great' or 'large,' used to describe size, intensity, or importance. It can refer to physical dimensions, such as a stone or city, or to abstract qualities like love or fear. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including Matthew 2:10 and Revelation 11:8. The word has comparative and superlative forms: μείζων (greater) and μέγιστος (greatest).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα,

[in LXX chiefly for גָּדוֹל, also for רַב, מַרְבֶּה (incl. μείζων), רֹב (μέγιστος);]

great;

of external form, bodily size, measure, extent: λίθος, Mt 2:60; δράκων, Re 12:3; ἰχθῦς, Jo 21:11; πόλις, Re 11:8; μάχαιρα, Re 6:4, al.

Of intensity and degree: δύναμις, Ac 4:33; φόβος, Mk 4:41; ἀγάπη, Jo 15:13; ἄνεμος, Jo 6:18; κραυγή, Ac 23:9; φῶς, Mt 4:16; πυρετός,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [(τοϊαϊοα to Lat. magnus, ADEE Goth. maist (cf. τὸ πλεῖστον), etc.; Vaniéek p. 682; Cur tius ὃ 462)], ace. μέγαν. μεγάλην, μέγα; plur. pokes ται, -a; comp. μείζων, -ον, (acc. πιᾶξο. and fem. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. v. 36 [RG T WH, but L Tr μείζων (cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 119)]; neut. plur. μείζονα, once contr. μείζω, Jn. i. 50 (51)) and pectorepos, 3 Jn. 4 (fr. the compar. μείζων), a poet. compar., on which see the remark quoted under ἐλαχιστότερος, cf. Matthiae § 136; superl. μέγιστος (found only in 2 Pet. i. 4); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for ὮΥΤΔ; also for 31; great; 1. predicated a. of the external form or sensible appearance of things (or of persons); in particular, of space and its dimensions, — as respects a. mass and weight: λίθος, Mt. xxvii. 60; Mk. xvi. 4; Rev. xviii. 21; ὄρος, Rey. viii. 8; ἀστήρ, ibid. 10; δράκων Rev. xii. 3,9; ἀετός, ibid. 14; δένδρον…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μέγας (B.C. 112) (= Selections, p. 30) μεγαλοίυϊπρεπέστερον ἐγδεχθήτωι, ‘let him be received with special magnificence ” (Edd.), PSI V. 4818 (v/vi a.p.) Tavptvyos ὃ μεγαλοπρεπέστί(ατος), and P Amh II. 154° (vi/vii A.D.) τοῦ peyadoπρε(πεστάτου) χαρτουλαρίου, ‘the most magnificent secretary.” For the subst. as a title of address cf. P Oxy VIII. 1163* (v/a.D.) ἐρωτηθὶς παρὰ τῆς αὐτοῦ μεγαλοπρεπίας ὅσα ἐχρῆν ἀνεδίδαξα αὐ τ]ὸν περὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας μεγαλο| πρεπίας, ‘Son the inquiry of his magnificence I told him what was fitting about your magnificence,” 76. I. 155° (vi/A.D.) ἐπειδὴ αἱ προσκυνοῦσαι τὴν ὑμετέραν μεγαλοπρί(έπειαν) καὶ τὰ παιδία ἀρρωστοῦσιν, ὡς ἔθος ἔχει τὸ ὑμῶν μέγεθος χαρίζεσθαί μου τοῦ λογαρίου, ‘since your magnificence’s obedient servants and their children are ill, I hope your highness will excuse my account” (Edd.). | , μεγαλύνω. With the use of this verb in the pass. in Phil…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέγας (megas) — great.

μέγᾰς, μεγάλη [ᾰ], μέγα [ᾰ],

genitive μεγάλου, ης, ου, dative μεγάλῳ, ῃ, ῳ, accusative μέγᾰν, μεγάλην, μέγα [ᾰ]; dual μεγάλω, α, w; plural μεγάλοι, μεγάλαι, μεγάλα, etc.: the stem μεγάλο- is never used in singular nominative and accusative masculine and neuter, and only once in vocative masculine,

__A ὦ μεγάλε Ζεῦ [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.I big, of bodily size: frequently of stature, εἶδος.. μ. ἦν ὁράασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φῶτα μέγαν καὶ καλόν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φύσιν τίν᾽ εἶχε φράζ; Answ. μέγας [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.b full-grown, of age as shown by stature, νῦν δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ μ. εἰμί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, elder of two persons of the same name, Wilcken [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Σκιπίων ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέγας

megas

(including the prolonged forms, feminine megale, plural

megaloi, etc.; compare also 3176, 3187); big (literally or

figuratively, in a very wide application):--(+ fear) exceedingly,

great(-est), high, large, loud, mighty, + (be) sore (afraid), strong,

X to years.

see GREEK for 3176

see GREEK for 3187

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα

Adj. & Comp.adv.

large, great

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέγας megas 243x

great, large in size, Mt. 27:60; Mk. 4:32; great, much, numerous, Mk. 5:11; Heb. 11:26; great, grown up, adult, Heb. 11:24; great, vehement, intense, Mt. 2:10; 28:8; great, sumptuous, Lk. 5:29; great, important, weighty, of high importance, 1 Cor. 9:11; 13:13; great, splendid, magnificent, Rev. 15:3; extraordinary, wonderful, 2 Cor.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέγας Radic. sense, opp. to μικρός, σμικρός, big, great, of men's stature, tall, Hom.; of women, καλή τε μεγάλη τε Od.:—also, great, full-grown, of age as shewn by stature, id. Od., Aesch.

vast, high, οὐρανός, ὄρος, πύργος Hom.

vast, spacious, wide, πέλαγός, αἰγιαλός, etc., id. Hom.

of Degree, great, strong, mighty, of gods, id. Hom., etc.; μεγάλα θεά, of Demeter and Proserpine, Soph.; μέγας ηὐξήθη rose to greatness, Dem.; βασιλεὺς ὁ μέγας, i. e. the King of Persia, le grand monarque, Hdt.; βασιλεὺς μέγας Aesch.; ὁ μ. ἐπικληθεὶς Ἀντίοχος the Great, Polyb.

great, strong, violent, etc., ἄνεμος, λαῖλαψ Hom.; of properties, passions, etc., id. Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
56%great
great56% · 137×greater15% · 36×loud14% · 34×greatest3% · 7×other renderings9% · 21×other renderings4% · 11×

246 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject27%adverbial26%predicate24%object22%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 243 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πόλιςa cityκαίand, even, also,ΒαβυλώνBabylon
φωνήa sound, noise, voic
κράζωI cry aloud, shrἐνφωνέωI crow, shout, s
καίand, even, also, nam
ποιέωI do, makeἀποθήκηa repository, grτέDisj
γάρfor
τίςIrgεἰμίI am, exist
φόβοςfear, terror, revere
φοβέωI fear, am terriγίνομαιI come into beinὅτιthat, since, bec
μέγαςgreat243×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakθαυμαστόςwonderful, marve
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἌρτεμιςthe Persian or EκάθημαιI sit, am seated
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theὧδεhereἐν
ἐν
Article theγεννητόςbegotten, bornσύ
ἐπί
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέγας · 243× in the New Testament
Revelation Luke Acts Matthew John Mark Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 John James 1 Timothy 2 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 340 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 85Pathyris114 BC

καὶ θεοῦ Φιλοπάτορος Νέου καὶ θεοῦ Εὐεργέτου καὶ θεῶν Φιλομητόρων Σωτήρων, ἱεροῦ πώλου Ἴσιδος μεγάλης μητρὸς θεῶν, ἀθλοφόρου Βερενίκης Εὐεργέτιδος, κανηφόρου Ἀρσινόης Φιλαδέλφου, ἱερείας Ἀρσινόης Φιλοπάτορος τῶν ὄντων ἐν

μετὰ τὴν ἐκείνου τελευτὴν τῶν λοιπῶν κρατουσῶν, Ἀρίστων Ἀθηνοδότου τῶν ἀπὸ Διὸς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης βιαιότερον ἐμβατεύσας εἰς τὸ δηλούμενον ἔδαφος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος καὶ εἰς τὰ συνκύροντα τούτωι ἐν

P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ὑψηλόν,hupsēlos high, G5308 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means high or lofty, used to describe physical locations like mountains in Matthew 4:8, as well as spiritual or moral heights.
Amplified meaning
elevated, towering above
Tyndale gloss
high
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑψηλός (i.e., *hupsēlos*) means high or lofty, both in a literal sense, such as mountains or walls, and metaphorically, referring to elevated thoughts or status. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to heaven and the exalted nature of Christ. The term is derived from the root for height and can imply pride or high-mindedness in certain usages.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑψηλός, -ή, -όν

[in LXX chiefly for בָּמָה, also for בָּמָה, רוּם, etc. ;]

high, lofty: ὄρος, Mt 4:8 17:1, Mk 9:2, Re 21:10; τεῖχος, ib. 12; μετὰ βραχίονος., fig., Ac 13:17 (cf. Ex 6:6, al); pl., ὑψηλά, of heaven (Ps 92 (93):4, Is 33:5, al.), He 1:3; compar., ὑψηλότερος τ. οὐρανῶν, He 7:26. Metaph: Lk 16:15; ὑψηλὰ φρονεῖν, Ro 11:20

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑψηλός, -7, -όν, (ὕψι on high, ὕψος), [fr. Hom. down], high; lofty; a. prop. of place: ὄρος, Mt. iv. 8; xvii.1; Mk. ix. 2; Lk.iv.5 RG@Lbr.; Rev. xxi. 10: τεῖχος, Rey. xxi. 12; neut. ra ὑψηλά (the heights of heaven; Sept. for Ὁ 5, Ps. xcii. (xciii.) 45 exii. (exiii.) 5; Is. xxxiii. 5; Ivii. 15), heaven [A.V. on high; cf. B. § 124, 8d.], Heb.i.3; exalted on high: ὑψηλότερος τῶν οὐρανῶν, [made higher than the heavens], of Christ raised to the right hand of God, Heb. vii. 26 (cf. Eph. iv.10); pera βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ, with a high (uplifted) arm, i. e. with signal power, Acts xiii. 17 (Sept. often ἐν βραχίονι ὑψηλῷ for 730) pyW3, as in Ex. vi.6; Deut. v. 15). b. metaph. eminent, exalted: in influence and honor, Lk. xvi. 15; ὑψηλὰ φρονεῖν, to set the mind on, to seek, high things (as honors and riches), to be aspiring, Ro. xii. 16; also Ro. xi. 20 Lmrg.T Tr WH; 1 Tim. vi. 17 T WH mrg.; (Leian.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑψηλός, “high”: BGU IV. 118524 (B.C. 94-93?) γεωμετρίαν δύσβροχον S[t]a τὸ λείαν ὑψηλὴν εἶναι, of height above the water level, P Thead 168 (after A.D. 307) ἐν ὑψηλοῖς τόποις. The reference is to bodily height in P Flor II. 142° (A.p. 264) ὄνους δύο θηλείας ὑψηλάς, ‘‘two tall female asses.” MGr ψηλός, “high.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑψηλός (hupsēlos) — high.

ὑψηλός, ή, όν

(also -ός, όν Demetr.Troezen. 1 Diels): comparative and superlative -ότερος, -ότατος, and irregular -έστατος[Refs 2nd c.AD+]: (ὕψι, ὕψος): —high, lofty, θάλαμος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a highland country, χώρη ὀρεινὴ.. καὶ ὑψηλή [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and ὑψηλά alone, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ ὑψηλοῦ εἶναι, καθῆσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐποικοδομήσαντες ὑψηλότερον [τὸ τεῖχος] [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb, -λῶς καθήμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. metaphorically, high, lofty, stately, proud, ὄλβος, ἀρεταί, κλέος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑψηλὰ κομπεῖν talk high and boastfully, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. of persons, opposed to δυσδαίμων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑψηλός

hupselos

from 5311; lofty (in place or character):--high(-er, -ly) (esteemed).

see GREEK for 5311

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑψηλός, ή, όν

Adj

high, lofty

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑψηλός hypsēlos 11x

high, lofty, elevated, Mt. 4:8; 17:1; τὰ ὑψηλά, the highest heaven, Heb. 1:3; upraised, Acts 13:17; met. highly esteemed, Lk. 16:15; φρονεῖν τὰ ὑψηλά, to have lofty thoughts, be proud, arrogant, Rom. 12:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑψηλός ὑψηλός, ή, όν ὕψι high, lofty, high-raised, Lat. altus, sublimis, Hom., Hdt., Trag., etc.; of a highland country, χώρη ὀρεινὴ καὶ ὑψηλή Hdt.; ὑψηλὰ χωρία Thuc.

metaph. high, lofty, stately, Pind., Plat.; ὑψηλὰ κομπεῖν to talk loftily, Soph.; πνεῦμα ὑψηλὸν αἴρειν Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%high
high67% · 8×uplifted8% · 1×haughty8% · 1×higher8% · 1×exalted8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial55%object27%subject9%predicate9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὄροςa mountain
εἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
μέγαςἁμαρτωλόςsinning, sinful,
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
ἐν
βραχίωνthe arm, strength
μετά
μήNeg
ἵστημιI cause to stand
ὑψηλόςhigh,11×
what comes after →
κατά
ἴδιοςone’s own, priva
φρονέωI think, judge, obse
ἀλλάbut, except
λίανvery, very much, exc
καίand, even, also,
βδέλυγμαan abominable thing,
ἐνώπιονbefore the face
ἐξάγωI lead out
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑψηλός · 11× in the New Testament
Hebrews Matthew Revelation Romans Acts Luke Mark
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 115 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 110c. AD 40

μεγάλα γὰρ καὶ μικρὰ ἢ πολλὰ καὶ ὀλίγα ἢ ἰδιωτικὰ καὶ δημόσια ἢ ἱερὰ καὶ βέβηλα ἢ ἀρχαῖα καὶ νέα οὐ τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἑρμηνεύσαι τρόπον, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἑκάστοις ἐφαρμόζοντα τῷ πλήθει καὶ ἀξιώματι καὶ μεγέθει, τοτὲ μὲν ὑψηλὸν αἴρων ἑαυτόν, τοτὲ δ’ ἔμπαλιν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.84c. AD 75–95

ἐπὶ τούτοις οὖν συγκαλεῖ τὸ πλῆθος εἰς ἐκκλησίαν ἀκουσόμενον ὧν ὁ θεὸς εἴποι πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ συναθροισθέντων στὰς ἐπὶ ὑψηλοῦ τινος, ὅθεν ἔμελλον πάντες ἀκούσεσθαι, ὁ μὲν θεός, εἶπεν, ὦ Ἑβραῖοι, καθάπερ καὶ πρότερον εὐμενὴς προσεδέξατό με καὶ βίον τε…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 12.2c. AD 100

τίθησιν οὖν Μωϋσῆς ἓν ἐφ̓ ἓν ὅπλον ἐν μέσῳ τῆς πυγμῆς, καὶ ὑψηλότερος σταθεὶς πάντων ἐξέτεινεν τὰς χεῖρας, καὶ οὕτως πάλιν ἐνίκα ὁ Ἰσραήλ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 5th c. AD
P.Harr. 1 109Antinoopolis (?)AD 201–AD 400

τοῦ ὄνου μοῦ μελέτω σοί. καὶ ἐὰν μὲν εὐτραφέστερος γένηται καὶ δυνηθῇ πραθῆναι, πώλησον. ὑψηλόν μοι οὖν ὤνησαι ἄξιον σοῦ. ὡς ἐπείκτης πράττε καὶ ἔπειγε τὸν σῖτον, ἵνα μὴ

P.Oxy. 54 3731OxyrhynchosAD 310–AD 311

α τάλαντον α λιβάνου λίτρας α δηνάρια σ μαλαβάθρου λίτρας α τάλαντον α στύρακος ὑψηλοῦ λίτρας α … στύρακος ἐλαφροῦ … κόστου λίτρας α … … μαστίχης λίτρας α

P.Oxy. 54 3733Oxyrhynchos (OxyrhynchitesAD 312

α τάλαντον α λιβάνου λίτρας α δηνάρια σ μαλαβάθρου λίτρας α τάλαντα β στύρακος ὑψηλοῦ λίτρας α δηνάρια Ασν στύρακος ἐλαφροῦ λίτρας α δηνάρια ψν κόστου λίτρας α τάλαντον

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ἔχουσαechō having G2192 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · feminine
709× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means to have or hold something, like a possession or ability. It is used in many ways, such as having power or being with someone. The Bible uses it in Revelation 5:8 and 14:6.
Tyndale gloss
to have/be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔχω,

[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]

(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),

to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.

Trans.;

to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;

to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;

of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mt 3:4 22:12, al.; so freq. pres. ptcp. (LS, s.v., A, I, 6; Bl., § 74, 2), Mk 11:13, Jo 18:10, Re 9:17, al.;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.

ἔχω,

__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔχω

echo

scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)

a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally

or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,

contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed

with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,

diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +

lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +

recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +

uncircumcised, use.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔχω

v.

I have, hold, possess

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔχω echō 708x

pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NSF — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
29%having
having29% · 211×has9% · 62×have8% · 58×you have7% · 52×i have5% · 36×we have5% · 35×he has3% · 24×had3% · 21×other renderings30% · 217×

716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
μήNeg
Article theδέbut, on the otheπρόβατονa sheep
ὅς
καίand, even, also,ἐνεἰμίI am, exist
χρείαneed, necessity, bus
οὐNegαὐτόςὅς
ἔχωhaving709×
what comes after →
Article the
ἑπτάIndecυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegὅς
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦΧριστόςanointed, the Me
οὖςthe ear
ἀκούωI hear, listen
ἐξουσίαpower, authority, we
Article theἀλλάbut, exceptἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔχω · 709× in the New Testament
Revelation John Luke Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Acts Hebrews 1 John Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Gen. 1 20Pathyris110 BC

ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω

P.Bad. 2 3Pathyris110 BC

Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω

P.Adl. 4Ptolemais (Oberägypten)110 BC

Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
πυλῶναςpulōn gates G4440 Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A gate-way or porch is an entrance to a building or city, used in Matthew 26:71 and Acts 10:17 to describe where events took place.
Amplified meaning
entrances, doorways
Tyndale gloss
gate
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πυλών (i.e., *pulōn*) refers to a gateway or porch, often associated with the entrance of a house or palace. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to gates of cities and the vestibules of buildings. The term is built from the root related to 'gate' and is noted for its use in both secular and religious architecture.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πυλών, -ῶνος, ὁ

(< πύλη),

[in LXX chiefly for פֶּתַח, שַׁעַר;]

the porch or vestibule of a house or palace: Mt 26:71, Lk 16:20, Ac 10:17 12:13, 14.

The gate-way or gate-tower of a walled town: Ac 14:13, Re 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25 22:14.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πυλών, -Ovos, 6, (πύλη), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept. often for Nd, sometimes for pw; 1. alarge gate: of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur. (of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 13, 15, 21, 25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior part of a house, into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi. 71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ἡ θύρα τοῦ πυλῶνος, ib. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πυλών, “gateway ” of a house (Mt 267) or city (Ac 1414) : P Tebt Il. 331° (c. A.D. 131) ἐπῆλθοίν αἸὐὐθάδως els ἣν exw ἐν TH κώμῃ οἰκίαν. . ἐν τῶ πυλῶνι, ‘made a bold attack upon my house in the village . . at the gateway ᾿᾿ (Edd.), P Ryl II. 233° (ii/A.D.) κωμοκάτοικοί εἰσιν ot ἔζχο]ντες πρὸ Tod πυλῶνός σου τὸν ψιλὸν τόπον, ‘the owners of the open plot in front of your gateway are villagers,” and the illiterate P Oxy XII. 14898 (late iii/A.D.) τὸ κιθώνιν ἐπιλέλισμε (ἡ ἐπιλέλησμαι) παρὰ Τεκοῦσαν eis τὸν πυλῶνα, ‘I have left my cloak behind with Tecusa at the gateway” (Edd.). Psaltes Gr. p. 24 n.' has collected exx. of the late form πυλεών. For πύλιον see Preisigke 2098", 52557.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πυλών (pulōn) — gate.

πυλ-ών, ῶνος, ὁ,

gateway, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; frequently separated from the house or temple to which it gave entrance, gate-tower, gate-house, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; of a temple, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; τετράθυρος π. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἡ θύρα τοῦ π. [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πυλών

pulon

from 4439; a gate-way, door-way of a building or city; by implication,

a portal or vestibule:--gate, porch.

see GREEK for 4439

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πυλών, ῶνος, ὁ

n.m.

a large gate, a gateway, porch

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πυλών pylōn 18x

a gateway, vestibule, Mt. 26:71; Lk. 16:20; a gate, Acts 14:13; Rev. 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πυλών πυ^λών, ῶνος, ὁ, πύλη a gateway, gate-house, Polyb., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Of cities De 3:5; Jos 6:26; 1Sa 23:7; 2Sa 18:24; 2Ch 8:5

→ Made of iron Ac 12:10

→ Made of wood Ne 1:3

→ Made of brass Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

→ Double doors Isa 45:1; Eze 41:24

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Design of

Isa 62:10

- MADE OF

. Brass

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

. Iron

Ac 12:10

- Often two-leaved

Isa 45:1

- Fastened with bars of iron

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

- MADE TO

. Cities

1Ki 17:10

. Houses

Lu 16:20; Ac 12:14

. Temples

Ac 3:2

. Palaces

Es 5:13

. Prisons

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Of Cities and Towns as places of Business

Ge 23:10; 34:20; De 16:18; 21:19; 22:15; Jos 20:4; Ru 4:1

2Sa 15:2; 1Ki 22:10; Pr 1:21; 22:22; Jer 14:2; Zec 8:16

(2) Punishment of Criminals outside of

De 17:5; Jer 20:2; Heb 13:12

(3) Of Jerusalem

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%gates
gates67% · 12×gate28% · 5×porch6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject39%adverbial33%object22%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίκαίand, even, also,εἰς
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὑψηλόςhigh, lofty
ἀνατολήrising of the sun, t
ἀπό
βορρᾶςthe north wind, the
ἀπό
νότοςthe south wind, the
ἀπό
πυλώνgates18×
what comes after →
τρεῖςthree
καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ἑλκόωI afflict with sκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
δώδεκαIndec
καίand, even, also,μαργαρίτηςa pearl
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
αὐτός
προσέρχομαιI come near, consent
παιδίσκηa female slave,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπυλών · 18× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.40c. AD 40

ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις τοῦ θαλάμου ἐκτὸς μέν ἐστιν ὁ ἀνδρών, ἐντὸς δὲ ὁ αὐλών, καὶ ἡ αὔλειος ἐκτὸς μὲν τῆς αὐλῆς, εἴσω δὲ τοῦ πυλῶνος, οὕτως καὶ ἐπὶ ψυχῆς δύναται τὸ ἐκτός τινος ἐντὸς εἶναι [τοῦ] ἑτέρου.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.111c. AD 75–95

τῆς δὲ τετάρτης πλευρᾶς, πεντήκοντα γὰρ οὖσα πήχεων ἡ ἑτέρα μέτωπον τοῦ παντὸς ἦν, εἴκοσι μὲν πήχεις ἀνεῴγεσαν κατὰ πύλας, ἐν αἷς ἀνὰ δύο κάμακες εἱστήκεσαν κατὰ μίμησιν πυλώνων.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 48.4c. AD 96

πολλῶν οὖν πυλῶν ἀνεῳγυιῶν ἡ ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν ᾗ μακάριοι πάντες οἱ εἰσελθόντες καὶ κατευθύνοντες τὴν πορείαν αὐτῶν ἐν ὁσιότητι καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, ἀταράχως πάντα ἐπιτελοῦντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
PSI 10 1149Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 14

των τῶν πυλῶν ἐν αὐτῶι τῶι ἱερῶι ἰδιώτας γει… … αι βυσσουργούς τε καὶ ἀρτοκόπους καὶ ἕτερα

P.Mich. 5 226Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 37

κραταιοῦ θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγίστου θησαυρὸν ἐνεργὸν ἐν ὧι πύργος καὶ προσπαρακείμενος ἕτερος πύργος καὶ πυλών, ἡμῶν δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑτέρων ἡμῶν ἱερέων παραλαμβανόντων παρὰ τῶν προγεγραμμένων Ἀπύνχεως καὶ τῆς

P.Theon. 21OxyrhynchitesAD 160

Ἰουλίων Θέωνος καὶ Θέωνος τοῦ καὶ Τρύφωνος Δε … μ … … … … πυλῶνος ἱππῶνος τιμῆς ἐλαίου εἰς λύχνον πυλῶνος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἱππῶνος ὑπὲρ Τῦβι κοτυλῶν β, ἐξ

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
δώδεκαdōdeka twelve G1427 Adjective · nominative
75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means the number twelve, like the twelve apostles in Matthew 10:1. It is used to describe a dozen of something in the Bible.
Tyndale gloss
twelve
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δώδεκα, οἱ, αἱ, τά indecl.

numeral, twelve: Mt 9:20 10:1, al.; οἱ δ., the apostles, Mt 10:5, Mk 4:10, al.; in Ac 19:7 24:11, for Rec. δεκαδύο.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.

δῠώδεκα,

Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δώδεκα

dodeka

from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.

see GREEK for 1417

see GREEK for 1176

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δώδεκα

Indec.num.

twelve

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δώδεκα dōdeka 75x

twelve, Mt. 9:20; 10:1; οἱ δώδεκα, the twelve apostles, Mt. 26:14, 20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).

See APOSTLE; NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%twelve
twelve99% · 76×other renderings1% · 1×

77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject41%object31%adverbial12%predicate11%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἷςoneδέbut, on the otheμετά
ἔτοςa year
γάρforγίνομαιI come into beinὡςas, like as, how
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόἐπί
κλάσμαa fragment
Article theαἴρωI raise, lift up
πυλώνa large gate, a gate
ἔχωI have, hold, poδώδεκαIndec
δώδεκαtwelve75×
what comes after →
χιλιάςa thousand
ἐκσφραγίζωI set a seal upoArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπίἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐξίστημιI astonish, am a
Article the
λέγωI say, speakπαραβολήa parable, compaἐμβάπτωI dip into
φυλήa tribe, race
Article theκρίνωI judge, decide,υἱόςa son, descenden
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδώδεκα · 75× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Matthew Luke John Acts 1 Corinthians James
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 60c. AD 40

ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 43.2c. AD 96

ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 21Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 131

ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ

P.Harr. 2 190Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 138

Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .

O.Wilck. 2 192Elephantine oder SyeneAD 143

μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ἐπὶepi at G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%upon
upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m
πίπτωI fall, fall under
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,
ἐπίat886×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theὅςκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
τοῖςho the G3588 Article · dative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DPM — Article · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
πυλῶσινpulōn gates G4440 Noun · dative · plural · masculine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A gate-way or porch is an entrance to a building or city, used in Matthew 26:71 and Acts 10:17 to describe where events took place.
Amplified meaning
entrances, doorways
Tyndale gloss
gate
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πυλών (i.e., *pulōn*) refers to a gateway or porch, often associated with the entrance of a house or palace. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to gates of cities and the vestibules of buildings. The term is built from the root related to 'gate' and is noted for its use in both secular and religious architecture.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πυλών, -ῶνος, ὁ

(< πύλη),

[in LXX chiefly for פֶּתַח, שַׁעַר;]

the porch or vestibule of a house or palace: Mt 26:71, Lk 16:20, Ac 10:17 12:13, 14.

The gate-way or gate-tower of a walled town: Ac 14:13, Re 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25 22:14.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πυλών, -Ovos, 6, (πύλη), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept. often for Nd, sometimes for pw; 1. alarge gate: of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur. (of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 13, 15, 21, 25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior part of a house, into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi. 71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ἡ θύρα τοῦ πυλῶνος, ib. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πυλών, “gateway ” of a house (Mt 267) or city (Ac 1414) : P Tebt Il. 331° (c. A.D. 131) ἐπῆλθοίν αἸὐὐθάδως els ἣν exw ἐν TH κώμῃ οἰκίαν. . ἐν τῶ πυλῶνι, ‘made a bold attack upon my house in the village . . at the gateway ᾿᾿ (Edd.), P Ryl II. 233° (ii/A.D.) κωμοκάτοικοί εἰσιν ot ἔζχο]ντες πρὸ Tod πυλῶνός σου τὸν ψιλὸν τόπον, ‘the owners of the open plot in front of your gateway are villagers,” and the illiterate P Oxy XII. 14898 (late iii/A.D.) τὸ κιθώνιν ἐπιλέλισμε (ἡ ἐπιλέλησμαι) παρὰ Τεκοῦσαν eis τὸν πυλῶνα, ‘I have left my cloak behind with Tecusa at the gateway” (Edd.). Psaltes Gr. p. 24 n.' has collected exx. of the late form πυλεών. For πύλιον see Preisigke 2098", 52557.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πυλών (pulōn) — gate.

πυλ-ών, ῶνος, ὁ,

gateway, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; frequently separated from the house or temple to which it gave entrance, gate-tower, gate-house, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; of a temple, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; τετράθυρος π. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἡ θύρα τοῦ π. [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πυλών

pulon

from 4439; a gate-way, door-way of a building or city; by implication,

a portal or vestibule:--gate, porch.

see GREEK for 4439

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πυλών, ῶνος, ὁ

n.m.

a large gate, a gateway, porch

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πυλών pylōn 18x

a gateway, vestibule, Mt. 26:71; Lk. 16:20; a gate, Acts 14:13; Rev. 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πυλών πυ^λών, ῶνος, ὁ, πύλη a gateway, gate-house, Polyb., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Of cities De 3:5; Jos 6:26; 1Sa 23:7; 2Sa 18:24; 2Ch 8:5

→ Made of iron Ac 12:10

→ Made of wood Ne 1:3

→ Made of brass Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

→ Double doors Isa 45:1; Eze 41:24

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Design of

Isa 62:10

- MADE OF

. Brass

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

. Iron

Ac 12:10

- Often two-leaved

Isa 45:1

- Fastened with bars of iron

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

- MADE TO

. Cities

1Ki 17:10

. Houses

Lu 16:20; Ac 12:14

. Temples

Ac 3:2

. Palaces

Es 5:13

. Prisons

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Of Cities and Towns as places of Business

Ge 23:10; 34:20; De 16:18; 21:19; 22:15; Jos 20:4; Ru 4:1

2Sa 15:2; 1Ki 22:10; Pr 1:21; 22:22; Jer 14:2; Zec 8:16

(2) Punishment of Criminals outside of

De 17:5; Jer 20:2; Heb 13:12

(3) Of Jerusalem

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%gates
gates67% · 12×gate28% · 5×porch6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject39%adverbial33%object22%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίκαίand, even, also,εἰς
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὑψηλόςhigh, lofty
ἀνατολήrising of the sun, t
ἀπό
βορρᾶςthe north wind, the
ἀπό
νότοςthe south wind, the
ἀπό
πυλώνgates18×
what comes after →
τρεῖςthree
καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ἑλκόωI afflict with sκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
δώδεκαIndec
καίand, even, also,μαργαρίτηςa pearl
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
αὐτός
προσέρχομαιI come near, consent
παιδίσκηa female slave,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπυλών · 18× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.40c. AD 40

ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις τοῦ θαλάμου ἐκτὸς μέν ἐστιν ὁ ἀνδρών, ἐντὸς δὲ ὁ αὐλών, καὶ ἡ αὔλειος ἐκτὸς μὲν τῆς αὐλῆς, εἴσω δὲ τοῦ πυλῶνος, οὕτως καὶ ἐπὶ ψυχῆς δύναται τὸ ἐκτός τινος ἐντὸς εἶναι [τοῦ] ἑτέρου.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.111c. AD 75–95

τῆς δὲ τετάρτης πλευρᾶς, πεντήκοντα γὰρ οὖσα πήχεων ἡ ἑτέρα μέτωπον τοῦ παντὸς ἦν, εἴκοσι μὲν πήχεις ἀνεῴγεσαν κατὰ πύλας, ἐν αἷς ἀνὰ δύο κάμακες εἱστήκεσαν κατὰ μίμησιν πυλώνων.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 48.4c. AD 96

πολλῶν οὖν πυλῶν ἀνεῳγυιῶν ἡ ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν ᾗ μακάριοι πάντες οἱ εἰσελθόντες καὶ κατευθύνοντες τὴν πορείαν αὐτῶν ἐν ὁσιότητι καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, ἀταράχως πάντα ἐπιτελοῦντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
PSI 10 1149Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 14

των τῶν πυλῶν ἐν αὐτῶι τῶι ἱερῶι ἰδιώτας γει… … αι βυσσουργούς τε καὶ ἀρτοκόπους καὶ ἕτερα

P.Mich. 5 226Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 37

κραταιοῦ θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγίστου θησαυρὸν ἐνεργὸν ἐν ὧι πύργος καὶ προσπαρακείμενος ἕτερος πύργος καὶ πυλών, ἡμῶν δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑτέρων ἡμῶν ἱερέων παραλαμβανόντων παρὰ τῶν προγεγραμμένων Ἀπύνχεως καὶ τῆς

P.Theon. 21OxyrhynchitesAD 160

Ἰουλίων Θέωνος καὶ Θέωνος τοῦ καὶ Τρύφωνος Δε … μ … … … … πυλῶνος ἱππῶνος τιμῆς ἐλαίου εἰς λύχνον πυλῶνος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἱππῶνος ὑπὲρ Τῦβι κοτυλῶν β, ἐξ

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ἀγγέλουςangelos angels G32 Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
176× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
An angel is a messenger, especially a heavenly being who serves as a messenger of God, as seen in Matthew 11:10 and Luke 1:11.
Amplified meaning
messengers, heavenly beings
Tyndale gloss
angel
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄγγελος (transliterated as aggelos) means 'messenger' and is often used to refer to a divine messenger or angel. It is derived from the verb ἀγγέλλω (to announce). In the New Testament, it encompasses both heavenly beings sent by God and human messengers, with interpretations varying regarding its use in specific contexts, such as in Revelation where it may refer to church leaders or guardian angels.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ;]

a messenger, one sent: Mt 11:10, Ja 22:25.

As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Lk 1:11, or to execute them, as Mt 4:6. The ἄ. in Re 1:20 2:1, al., is variously understood as

a messenger or delegate,

a bishop or ruler,

a guardian angel,

the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, s.v.; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, s.v.)

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vil. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. li. 25. [Fr. Hom. down. ] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk.i. 13; Lk. xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, ef. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (LK. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.; Acts x. 3; xxvii. 23; Mt. i. 20; ii. 13; xxviii. 5; Jn. xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ἄγγελος (angel, messenger of God, 3x90) and ἄγγελοι κυρίου or ayy. τοῦ θεοῦ. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, ef. Eph. i. 21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄγγελος. In Sy// 51271, a dialect inscr. of ii/B.c. from Calymna, ἄγγελοι are envoys whose names are given. The word is used in the sense of ‘‘intermediary” (cf. Gal 319) in Sy// 122” (iv/B.C.) ὀμόσαι δ] ἀγγέλλων. For the presumably Christian ‘‘angel” inscriptions from Thera see Deissmann LAE, Ῥ. 279 with accompanying facsimile, and the paper “It is his Angel” (J. H. M.) in 71.5 1902, p. 519 f. Add (from Cronert) 7G XII. iii. 933. In Archzv iii. p. 445, No. 67, is published a Greek inscription from Assouan of the time of M. Aurelius, which begins—MeyaAy τύχῃ τοῦ [θε]ο[ῦ. . . τ]ῶν ἀνγέλων τῆς [ἱ]ερεί[ας] : cf. alsop. 451 No. 94 (time of Diocletian), Ὑπὲρ εὐχῆς τῶν ἀνγέλων ’Epeonvol ἀνέθηκαν | κτὰ. Οἱ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ, as in 1 Tim 54, occurs in the extremely interesting Jewish inscription Sy// 816'° κύριε Oo | πάντα ἐ[φ)ορῶν kal οἱ ἄνγελοι θεοῦ. Dittenberger assigns it to i/A.D. and yet…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel.

ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,

messenger, envoy, [Refs 8th c.BC+] — proverbial, Ἀράβιος ἄ., of a loquacious person, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. generally, one that announces or tells, e.g. of birds of augury, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἄ. ἄφθογγος, of a beacon, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of the nightingale, ὄρνις.. Διὸς ἄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. angel, [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]

4. in later philosophical, semi-divine being, ἡλιακοὶ ἄ.[Refs 4th c.AD+] in R.2.243 K.; ἄ. καὶ ἀρχάγγελοι[Refs 5th c.AD+]: also in mystical and magical writings, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. title of Artemis at Syracuse, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel: messenger.

ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄγγελος

aggelos

from aggello (probably derived from 71; compare 34) (to bring

tidings); a messenger; especially an "angel"; by implication, a

pastor:--angel, messenger.

see GREEK for 71

see GREEK for 34

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄγγελος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

an angel, messenger

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀγγέλλω angellō 1x

to tell, to announce, Jn. 20:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄγγελος a messenger, envoy, Hom., Hdt., attic

generally, one that announces, of birds of augury, Il.; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, Theogn.; Διὸς ἄγγ., of the nightingale, Soph.; c. gen. rei, ἄγγ. κακῶν ἐμῶν id. Soph.

a divine messenger, an angel, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

By the word "angels" (i.e. "messengers" of God) we ordinarily understand a race of spiritual beings of a nature exalted far above that of man, although infinitely removed from that of God--whose office is "to do him service in heaven, and by his appointment to succor and defend men on earth. I. Scriptural use of the word . --There are many passages in which the expression "angel of God" is certainly used for a manifestation of God himself (Genesis 22:11) with Genesis 22:12 and Exod 3:2 with Exod 3:6 and Exod 3:14 It is to be observed, also, that side by side with these expressions we read of God’s being manifested in the…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Created by God and Christ

Ne 9:6; Col 1:16

- Worship God and Christ

Ne 9:6; Php 2:9-11; Heb 1:6

- Are ministering Spirits

1Ki 19:5; Ps 68:17; 104:4; Lu 16:22; Ac 12:7-11; 27:23; Heb 1:7,14

- Communicate the will of God and Christ

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Ministering

Ge 16:7; 19:16; 22:11; Ex 14:19; 23:20; 1Ki 19:5; Ps 91:11; Isa 63:9

Da 3:28; 6:22; Mr 1:13; Lu 16:22; Ac 5:19; 12:7; 27:23; Heb 1:14

(2) Appear to Men

Ge 32:1; Nu 22:31; Jud 2:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%angel
angel52% · 95×angels43% · 79×messenger2% · 4×other renderings3% · 6×

184 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject49%adverbial23%object14%indirect object10%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἀποστέλλωI send forth, seαὐτός
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
καίand, even, also,ὁράωI see, look upon
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,ἐνθυμέομαιI meditate upon,αὐτός
ἑπτάIndec
Article the
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheπατάσσωI strikeὑποτάσσωI place under, s
ἄγγελοςangels176×
what comes after →
Article the
ἐνθεόςGod, a godἔχωI have, hold, po
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἐντέλλομαιI give orders, cμετά
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
φαίνωI shine, appear,ἐφίστημιI stand by, am uκατά
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀφορίζωI rail off, sepaἐπισυνάγωI collect, gatheοὐNeg
ἐν
Article theοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaλευκόςwhite, bright

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄγγελος · 176× in the New Testament
Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Hebrews Mark 1 Corinthians John Galatians 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 119 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.177c. AD 40

„ὁ θεός, ᾧ εὐηρέστησαν οἱ πατέρες μου Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαάκ, ὁ θεὸς ὁ τρέφων με ἐκ νεότητος ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ ῥυόμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν, εὐλογήσαι τὰ παιδία ταῦτα“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.73c. AD 75–95

πολλοὶ γὰρ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ γυναιξὶ συνιόντες ὑβριστὰς ἐγέννησαν παῖδας καὶ παντὸς ὑπερόπτας καλοῦ διὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τῇ δυνάμει πεποίθησιν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.4c. AD 100

ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡ περιτομή, ἐφ̓ ᾗ πεποίθασιν, κατήργηται, περιτομὴν γὰρ εἴρηκεν οὐ σαρκὸς γενηθῆναι: ἀλλὰ παρέβησαν, ὅτι ἄγγελος πονηρὸς ἐσόφιζεν αὐτούς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 5th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59408Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)276 BC–227 BC

τὸ ἐφόδιον, ὅπως ἂν ἀνακομισθῶ πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ δοκῆι με αὐτοῦ καταρρᾳθυμεῖν. καὶ ἄγγελόν μοι ἀπέστειλε καλῶν με. σὺ οὖν μοι τί συντάσσεις; εὐτύχει.

BASP 20 (1983), p. 44-Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 287

τὸν σταχθέντα ἐνιαύσιον χρόνον· καὶ ἐμοῦ ται τε Κορνηλίου ἀποπληρώσαντος καθʼ ὁμοιότητα καὶ ἐγὼ ἀγγελῶ τὸν ὁμογνήσιον σοῦ ἀδελφὸν Διόσκορον τῷ ἑξῆς ἔτει ἐκτελοῦντα καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν αὐτὸν ἐνιαύσιον

Ch.L.A. 11 517 descr.Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 376–AD 425

α … ατερα … α … ω … ταύταις ταῖς φωναῖς ἐχρήσατο ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ μου ὁ ῥυσάμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν μου. διό, γνήσιε τέκνον

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
δώδεκα,dōdeka twelve, G1427 Adjective · nominative
75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means the number twelve, like the twelve apostles in Matthew 10:1. It is used to describe a dozen of something in the Bible.
Tyndale gloss
twelve
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δώδεκα, οἱ, αἱ, τά indecl.

numeral, twelve: Mt 9:20 10:1, al.; οἱ δ., the apostles, Mt 10:5, Mk 4:10, al.; in Ac 19:7 24:11, for Rec. δεκαδύο.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.

δῠώδεκα,

Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δώδεκα

dodeka

from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.

see GREEK for 1417

see GREEK for 1176

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δώδεκα

Indec.num.

twelve

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δώδεκα dōdeka 75x

twelve, Mt. 9:20; 10:1; οἱ δώδεκα, the twelve apostles, Mt. 26:14, 20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).

See APOSTLE; NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%twelve
twelve99% · 76×other renderings1% · 1×

77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject41%object31%adverbial12%predicate11%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἷςoneδέbut, on the otheμετά
ἔτοςa year
γάρforγίνομαιI come into beinὡςas, like as, how
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόἐπί
κλάσμαa fragment
Article theαἴρωI raise, lift up
πυλώνa large gate, a gate
ἔχωI have, hold, poδώδεκαIndec
δώδεκαtwelve,75×
what comes after →
χιλιάςa thousand
ἐκσφραγίζωI set a seal upoArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπίἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐξίστημιI astonish, am a
Article the
λέγωI say, speakπαραβολήa parable, compaἐμβάπτωI dip into
φυλήa tribe, race
Article theκρίνωI judge, decide,υἱόςa son, descenden
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδώδεκα · 75× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Matthew Luke John Acts 1 Corinthians James
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 60c. AD 40

ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 43.2c. AD 96

ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 21Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 131

ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ

P.Harr. 2 190Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 138

Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .

O.Wilck. 2 192Elephantine oder SyeneAD 143

μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ὀνόματαonoma names G3686 Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
229× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A name refers to a person's character or authority, as in Matthew 10:2 and John 18:10. It represents who someone is or what they are known for. Jesus taught about the importance of a good name and reputation.
Amplified meaning
identities, designations
Tyndale gloss
name
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὄνομα (onoma) means 'name' and can refer to the title or reputation of a person or thing. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as indicating authority or character (e.g., Mt 10:41) and is often contrasted with the reality behind the name (e.g., Rev 3:1). The term can also signify a mere name or pretext, as seen in Mk 9:41.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄνομα, -τος, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for שֵׁם;]

in general, the name by which a person or thing is called: Mt 10:2, Mk 3:16, Lk 1:63, Jo 18:10, al.; ἄνθρωπος (etc.), ᾧ (οὗ) ὄ. (τ. ὄ), sc. ἦν or ἐστίν (Bl., § 30, 3), Mk 14:32, Lk 1:26, 27; with same ellipsis, καὶ τ. ὄ. αὐτοῦ (ὄ. αὐτῷ), Lk 1:5, Jo 1:6, al.; ὀνόματι, seq. nom. prop., Mt 27:32, Mk 5:22, Lk 1:5, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄνομα, -ros, τό, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p. 1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for pw, [fr. Hom. down], the name by which a person or a thing is called, and distinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names, Mk. iii. 16; vi. 14; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; ἄνθρωπος or ἀνὴρ @ ὄνομα, πόλις ἢ Ov. , Sc. ἦν, named, foll. by the name in the nom. [ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26sq.; 11. 25; viii. 41; xxiv. 13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1); οὗ [L ᾧ] τὸ ὄνομα, Mk. xiv. 32; καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, ete., Lk. i. 5, 27; ὄνομα αὐτῷ se. ἦν or ἐστίν [B. u.s.], Jn. i.6; ili. 1; xviii. 10; Rey. vi. 8; ὀνόματι, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 3; W. 182 (171) ], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x. 38; xvi. 20; xxiii.50; Actsv. 1,34; vili. 9; ix. 10-12, 33, 86; χ- 1; χὶ; 28,5 Χ- 19., χυ!. ἔν 14.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄνομα. (1) For ὄνομα, the ame by which a person or thing is called, we may cite: P Magd 24! (B.c. 218) Αἰγυπτία τις, ἧι λέγεται εἶναι ὄνομα Ψενοβάστι[ς, P Lond 854” (i/ii a.p.) (ΞΞ ΠΙ. p. 206, Selections p. 70) τῶν φίλων [ἐ]μ[ῶν τ]ὰ ὀνόματα ἐνεχάραξα τοῖς ἱ[εἸροῖς ἀειμνή (σὺ τως, “1 carved the names of my friends on the sanctuaries for perpetual remembrance ”—a traveller’s letter, and BGU 11. 4232 (i1/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 92) to[t]t [δέ] pov ὄνομα ᾿Αντῶνις Μάξιμος. Deissmann (1.4.3, p. 121) claims the phrase ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα as ‘‘a characteristic documentary formula,” e.g. P Oxy III. 485%! (a.p. 178) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐπὶ τῶν [τόπων δηλωθήσεται, ““ whose names will be ascertained on the spot” (Edd.), BGU 11. 432-38 (a.p. 190) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται, “whose names are shown in the little book” (cf. Phil 43). (2) By a usage similar to that of the Heb. Dv’, ὄνομα comes in the NT to…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄνομα (onoma) — name.

ὄνομα,

Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect ὄνῠμα [Refs]; Laconian dialect *ἔνυμα probably in proper nouns Ἐνυμακρατίδας [Refs]; poetry also (for the sake of meter) οὔνομα (see.below), which appears regularly in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in other Ionic dialect prose authors (variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+], but is probably not Ionic; Ionic dialect Inscrr. have only ὄνομα, [Refs 8th c.BC+] et saep.:—name of a person or thing, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always of a person, except ἐρέω δέ τοι οὔνομα λαῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ἀρήτη δ᾽ ὄνομ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐπώνυμον [Refs 8th c.BC+] is used absolutely, by name, πόλις ὄ. Καιναί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀνόματι λέγειν by name, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὄνομα by name, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἀσπάζου τοὺς φίλους κατ᾽ ὄ. each by his name…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄνομα

onoma

from a presumed derivative of the base of 1097 (compare 3685); a

"name" (literally or figuratively) (authority, character):--called, (+

sur-)name(-d).

see GREEK for 1097

see GREEK for 3685

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄνομα, ατος, τό

n.n.

name, character, reputation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄνομα onoma 231x

a name; the proper name of a person, etc., Mt. 1:23, 25; 10:2; 27:32; a mere name or reputation, Rev. 3:1; in NT a name as the representative of a person, Mt. 6:9; Lk. 6:22; 11:2; the name of the author of a commission, delegated authority, or religious profession, Mt. 7:22; 10:22; 12:21; 18:5, 20; 19:29; 21:9; 28:19; Acts 3:16; 4:7, 12; εἰς ὄνομα, ἐν ὀνόματι, on the score of being possessor of a certain character, Mt. 10:41, 42; Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄνομα ὄνομα, ατος, τό, Lat. nomen, a name, Hom., etc.:—absol., by name, πόλις ὄνομα Καιναί Xen., etc.; also in dat., πόλις Θάψακος ὀνόματι id. Xen.

ὄν. θεῖναί τινα to give one a name, Od.; but commonly in Mid., ὄν. θέσθαι id. Od., attic; and for Pass., ὄν. κεῖταί τινι Ar., etc.; ὄν. ἔχειν ἀπό τινος Hdt.

ὄνομα καλεῖν τινα to call one by name, Od., attic; so with pass. verbs. ὄν. ὠνομάζετο Ἕλενος Soph.; ὄν. κέκληται δημοκρατία Thuc.

name. fame, Ἰθάκης γε καὶ ἐς Τροίην ὄνομ᾽ ἵκει Od.; τὸ μέγα ὄν. τῶν Ἀθηνῶν Thuc.; ὄνομα or τὸ ὄν. ἔχειν to have a name for a thing (good or bad), 2 opt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

Names of places . --These may be divided into two general classes --descriptive and historical. The former are such as mark some peculiarity of the locality, usually a natural one, e.g. Sharon, "plain" Gibeah, "hill;" Pisgah. "height." Of the second class of local names, some were given in honor of individual men, e.g. the city Enoch (Genesis 4:17) etc. More commonly, however, such names were given to perpetuate that memory of some important historic occurrence. Bethel perpetuated through all Jewish history the early revelations of God to Jacob. (Genesis 28:19; 35:15) So Jehovah-jireh, (Genesis 22:14) Mahanaim, (Genesis 32:2) Peniel etc. In forming compounds to serve as…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Among the Hebrews were frequently significant; sometimes of a family trait, and sometimes of circumstances attending the birth of a child; often too they were assumed afterwards to commemorate some striking occurrence in one’s history. Compare the cases of Ishmael, Esau, and Jacob, Moses, Ichabod, etc., Ge 16:16 25:25,26 Ex 2:10 1Sa 4:21.

Compound names were frequent; and often a part of the name of God, JAH EL, JEHO, etc., was employed as in Eliezer, Ex 18:4, Amuel, Josiah, Adonijah. Sometimes a whole phrase was formed into a name; as Elioneai, to Jehovah are mine eyes, 1Ch 4:36. The New Testament names are chiefly…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
81%name
name81% · 187×named13% · 29×names6% · 13×other renderings1% · 2×

231 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial57%object21%subject20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 229 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐπίδιά
ἐν
ἔρχομαιI come, goπᾶςall, the whole, ὕδωρwater
τὶς
δέbut, on the otheἱερεύςa priestἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐκἐπάνωon the top, abov
ὅς
ἀνήρa male human beiἹεροσόλυμαPropΓαλιλαίαGalilee
ὄνομαnames229×
what comes after →
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἸησοῦςJesusἸωάννηςJohn
ἐγώ
ἐγώArticle theλέγωI say, speak
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pὅς
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
σῴζωI save, healὡσαννάHebrἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄνομα · 229× in the New Testament
Acts Revelation Luke John Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews Philippians 1 John James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 527 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 43Thebais201 BC–102 BC

τὸ … κέναι ἡμῖν τὴν ἵππον καὶ παρʼ Ἰουδαίου … σθαι αὐτήν, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα ἀγνοοῦμεν. αὐτοῦ δὲ μηδʼ ἀποδεδωκότος ἡμῖν μηδὲ ἵππον μηδὲ τὴν πορείαν αὐτῆς ἐπιδεδωκότος, ἐγράψαμέν

P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ Ἀμπέλιον

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … · τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ἐπιγεγραμμένα,epigraphō inscribed, G1924 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To write something down, like inscribing a message on a stone. In the Bible, it's used in Mark 15:26 to describe the sign above Jesus' cross.
Amplified meaning
written, engraved
Tyndale gloss
to write on
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιγράφω (i.e., *epigrapho*) combines the prefix for 'upon' with a root meaning 'to write.' It generally means to inscribe or write upon a surface, and can also have metaphorical uses, such as marking something indelibly in the mind. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Mark 15:26 and Acts 17:23, where it refers to inscriptions. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπι-γράφω

[in LXX for כָּתַב, Nu 17:2 (17); fig., Je 38(31):33, al. ;]

to write upon, inscribe: Mk 15:26, Ac 17:23, Re 21:12; fig., He 8:10 (LXX) He 10:16 (ib).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπι-γράφω : fut. ἐπιγράψω ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐπεγεγραμμένος ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπεγέγραπτο ; to write upon, inscribe: ἐπιγραφήν, Mk. xv. 26 and L Tr br. in Lk. xxiii. 38; ὀνόματα, Rev. xxi. 12; ἔν τινι, Acts xvii. 23; fig. to write upon the mind, i. e. to fix indelibly upon it, cause to cleave to it and to be always vividly present to it: νόμους ἐπὶ καρδίας [-δίαν T WH mrg.], Heb. viii. 10; ἐπὶ τῶν διανοιῶν, Heb. x. 16 RG, ἐπὶ τὴν διάνοιαν, ibid. 1, T Tr WH, (τοὺς λόγους ἐπὶ τὸ πλάτος τῆς καρδίας, Prov. vii. 3). [From Hom. down. ]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιγράφω. The use of the subst. for a ‘‘special impost’’ (see s.v. ἐπιγραφή) is supported by the verb in P Tebt I. 48% (c. B.c. 113) where reference is made to certain supplies of wheat ‘imposed ’’ in view of the approaching visit of King Soter 11.--τὴν ἐπιγεγραμμένην πρὸς τὴν τοῦ βασίλεως παρουσίαν ἀγορὰν (πυροῦ) (ἀρταβῶν) 7: cf. P Hib I. 445 (B.c. 253) of compulsory labour. The verb is also used of any one ‘appointed to”’ or ‘‘set apart for’’ an office, as P Oxy 11. 2515" (A.D. 44) ἐπιγέγραμμαι αὐτῆς κύριος, P Tebt II. 380%! (A.D. 67) ὑπογραφεῖς τῆς «Θ -- ομμοῦτο(ς) -- καὶ τοῦ > ἔπιγραψ -αμ:-ένου αὐτῆς κυρίου Λυσᾶς κτλ., ‘the signatories for Thommous and her appointed guardian are Lysas, etc.’’: so 26. 3972” 25 (A.p. 198). Similarly of the witnesses entered in an act, as e.g. Petr II. 21(d)? ἐπε]ὶ ἐπεγράφην μάρτυς ἐπὶ συγγραφῆ[ι. For the general sense ‘direct’ see P Ryl II. 153 (A.D.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιγράφω (epigraphō) — to write on.

ἐπιγρᾰφ-ω,

mark the surface, graze, [Refs 8th c.BC+] having put a mark on the lot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]. trifle with dishes, [Refs 8th c.BC+] the word has not the sense of writing.

II. write upon, inscribe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, [Refs]; especially write or place an epitaph on a tomb, [Refs]middle, have inscribed, ἐπεγράφου [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—passive, of the inscription, to be inscribed upon, ἐπιγέγραπταί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [ἐπίγραμμα] ὃ Μίδᾳ φασὶν ἐπιγεγράφθαι over or on the tomb of Midas, [Refs 5th c.BC+] addressed, of a letter, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; also, to have something inscribed upon one, ἐπεγράφοντο ῥόπαλα, ὡς Θηβαῖοι ὄντες used to bear clubs upon their shields, [Refs 5th c.BC+] having the articles inscribed upon it, [Refs 1st…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιγράφω

epigrapho

from 1909 and 1125; to inscribe (physically or

mentally):--inscription, write in (over, thereon).

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 1125

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιγράφω

v.

I write upon, inscribe

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιγράφω epigraphō 5x

pluperfect pass., ἐπεγεγράμμην, to imprint a mark on; to inscribe, engrave, write on, Mk. 15:26; Acts 17:23; Rev. 21:12; met. to imprint, impress deeply on, Heb. 8:10; 10:16*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιγράφω fut. ψω to mark the surface, just pierce, graze, ὀϊστὸς ἐπέγραψε χρόα Il.

to mark, put a mark on the lot, id. Il.—In Hom. the word has not any notion of writing.

to write upon, inscribe, Hdt.:—Pass., of the inscription, to be inscribed upon, id. Hdt.; also, ἐπεγράφου τὴν Γοργόνα hadst the Gorgon painted on thy shield, Ar.

in attic law phrases:

to set down the penalty or damages in the title of an indictment, id. Ar.; τὰ ἐπιγεγραμμένα the damages claimed, Dem.:—so in Mid., Aeschin.

to register, Oratt.:—Mid. to have one's name registered, Thuc.; also, ἐπεγράψαντο πολίτας had them registered as citizens, id. Thuc.

προστάτην ἐπιγράψασθαι to choose a patron, and have his name entered in the public register, as all μέτοικοι at Athens were obliged to do, Ar.;—so, ἐπιγράψασθαί τινα κύριον…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-APN — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-APN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%i will inscribe
i will inscribe40% · 2×had been inscribed20% · 1×inscribed20% · 1×written20% · 1×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
αἰτίαa cause, reason,καρδίαthe heart, innerδιάνοιαunderstanding, i
ὅς
ἐν
ὄνομαname, character, rep
καίand, even, also,
ἐπιγράφωinscribed,
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,
Article the
βασιλεύςa king, ruler, e
ἄγνωστοςunknown
θεόςGod, a god
ὅς
εἰμίI am, exist

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπιγράφω · 5× in the New Testament
Hebrews Acts Mark Revelation
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Life of Moses 2.179c. AD 40

τῇ δ’ ὑστεραίᾳ λογίῳ πληχθείς, ἅπαντος τοῦ ἔθνους παρεστῶτος, εἰσέρχεται καὶ τὰς ῥάβδους ἐκκομίζει, τὰς μὲν ἄλλας οὐδὲν διάφορον ἐχούσας, μίαν δ’ ἐφ’ ᾗ τοὔνομα ἐπεγέγραπτο τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ τεθαυματουργημένην·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.63c. AD 75–95

Μωυσῆς δέ, καὶ γὰρ ἐκ πολλοῦ συνιστάμενον ἠκροᾶτο τὸν θόρυβον, δείσας μή τι νεωτερίσωσι πάλιν καὶ γένηταί τι μέγα καὶ χαλεπὸν συνήγαγε τὸ πλῆθος εἰς ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ περὶ μὲν ὧν ἠκροᾶτο εἰς ἀπολογίαν οὐ καθιστάμενος, ἵνα μὴ παροξύνῃ τὸ πλῆθος, αὐτὸ δὲ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Oxy. 12 1453Oxyrhynchos31 BC–30 BC

ἡμῶν ἀλληλεγγύων τῶν προγεγραμμένων, τῶν ὑπαρχόντων ἡμῖν πάντων ὄντων ἐπὶ τοῦ ποιήσειν κατὰ τὰ ἐπιγεγραμμένα. εὐορκοῦντι μέν μοι εὖ εἴη, ἐφιορκοῦντι δὲ τὰ ἐναντία. ἔτους α Καίσαρος

SB 5 7743AD 1–AD 200

τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν ἐπιστολήν μου καὶ πυρῆνος στάμνον καὶ ἄλικος στάμνον καὶ τραγημάτων σφυρίδα ἐπιγεγραμμένα εἰς ὄνομά σου, δήλωσόν μοι. περὶ τῆς ὑγιείας σου συνεχῶς μοι ἐπίστελλε καὶ περὶ

PSI 13 1325Alexandria (?)AD 172–AD 175

τῶν σφραγιστῶν … μητρὸς ἡμῶν Σαβινίας Ἀπολλωναρίου μετηλλαχυίας … … Ἀντώνιος Ἡλιόδωρος ὁ τά ἐπιγεγραμμένα δοὺς ἐμοὶ δε … … νυ τοῦ Ἡρακλεοπολίτου νομοῦ ἀπὸ κλήρου Γλε

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
hos, hē which G3739 Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · neuter
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NPN — Relative pronoun · nominative · plural · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NPN Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwhich1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ἐστινeimi are G1510 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίare2457×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
Article theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
τὰ the G3588
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
ὀνόματαonoma names G3686 Noun · nominative · plural · neuter
229× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A name refers to a person's character or authority, as in Matthew 10:2 and John 18:10. It represents who someone is or what they are known for. Jesus taught about the importance of a good name and reputation.
Tyndale gloss
name
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὄνομα (onoma) means 'name' and can refer to the title or reputation of a person or thing. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as indicating authority or character (e.g., Mt 10:41) and is often contrasted with the reality behind the name (e.g., Rev 3:1). The term can also signify a mere name or pretext, as seen in Mk 9:41.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄνομα, -τος, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for שֵׁם;]

in general, the name by which a person or thing is called: Mt 10:2, Mk 3:16, Lk 1:63, Jo 18:10, al.; ἄνθρωπος (etc.), ᾧ (οὗ) ὄ. (τ. ὄ), sc. ἦν or ἐστίν (Bl., § 30, 3), Mk 14:32, Lk 1:26, 27; with same ellipsis, καὶ τ. ὄ. αὐτοῦ (ὄ. αὐτῷ), Lk 1:5, Jo 1:6, al.; ὀνόματι, seq. nom. prop., Mt 27:32, Mk 5:22, Lk 1:5, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄνομα, -ros, τό, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p. 1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for pw, [fr. Hom. down], the name by which a person or a thing is called, and distinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names, Mk. iii. 16; vi. 14; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; ἄνθρωπος or ἀνὴρ @ ὄνομα, πόλις ἢ Ov. , Sc. ἦν, named, foll. by the name in the nom. [ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26sq.; 11. 25; viii. 41; xxiv. 13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1); οὗ [L ᾧ] τὸ ὄνομα, Mk. xiv. 32; καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, ete., Lk. i. 5, 27; ὄνομα αὐτῷ se. ἦν or ἐστίν [B. u.s.], Jn. i.6; ili. 1; xviii. 10; Rey. vi. 8; ὀνόματι, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 3; W. 182 (171) ], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x. 38; xvi. 20; xxiii.50; Actsv. 1,34; vili. 9; ix. 10-12, 33, 86; χ- 1; χὶ; 28,5 Χ- 19., χυ!. ἔν 14.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄνομα. (1) For ὄνομα, the ame by which a person or thing is called, we may cite: P Magd 24! (B.c. 218) Αἰγυπτία τις, ἧι λέγεται εἶναι ὄνομα Ψενοβάστι[ς, P Lond 854” (i/ii a.p.) (ΞΞ ΠΙ. p. 206, Selections p. 70) τῶν φίλων [ἐ]μ[ῶν τ]ὰ ὀνόματα ἐνεχάραξα τοῖς ἱ[εἸροῖς ἀειμνή (σὺ τως, “1 carved the names of my friends on the sanctuaries for perpetual remembrance ”—a traveller’s letter, and BGU 11. 4232 (i1/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 92) to[t]t [δέ] pov ὄνομα ᾿Αντῶνις Μάξιμος. Deissmann (1.4.3, p. 121) claims the phrase ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα as ‘‘a characteristic documentary formula,” e.g. P Oxy III. 485%! (a.p. 178) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐπὶ τῶν [τόπων δηλωθήσεται, ““ whose names will be ascertained on the spot” (Edd.), BGU 11. 432-38 (a.p. 190) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται, “whose names are shown in the little book” (cf. Phil 43). (2) By a usage similar to that of the Heb. Dv’, ὄνομα comes in the NT to…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄνομα (onoma) — name.

ὄνομα,

Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect ὄνῠμα [Refs]; Laconian dialect *ἔνυμα probably in proper nouns Ἐνυμακρατίδας [Refs]; poetry also (for the sake of meter) οὔνομα (see.below), which appears regularly in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in other Ionic dialect prose authors (variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+], but is probably not Ionic; Ionic dialect Inscrr. have only ὄνομα, [Refs 8th c.BC+] et saep.:—name of a person or thing, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always of a person, except ἐρέω δέ τοι οὔνομα λαῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ἀρήτη δ᾽ ὄνομ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐπώνυμον [Refs 8th c.BC+] is used absolutely, by name, πόλις ὄ. Καιναί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀνόματι λέγειν by name, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὄνομα by name, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἀσπάζου τοὺς φίλους κατ᾽ ὄ. each by his name…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄνομα

onoma

from a presumed derivative of the base of 1097 (compare 3685); a

"name" (literally or figuratively) (authority, character):--called, (+

sur-)name(-d).

see GREEK for 1097

see GREEK for 3685

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄνομα, ατος, τό

n.n.

name, character, reputation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄνομα onoma 231x

a name; the proper name of a person, etc., Mt. 1:23, 25; 10:2; 27:32; a mere name or reputation, Rev. 3:1; in NT a name as the representative of a person, Mt. 6:9; Lk. 6:22; 11:2; the name of the author of a commission, delegated authority, or religious profession, Mt. 7:22; 10:22; 12:21; 18:5, 20; 19:29; 21:9; 28:19; Acts 3:16; 4:7, 12; εἰς ὄνομα, ἐν ὀνόματι, on the score of being possessor of a certain character, Mt. 10:41, 42; Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄνομα ὄνομα, ατος, τό, Lat. nomen, a name, Hom., etc.:—absol., by name, πόλις ὄνομα Καιναί Xen., etc.; also in dat., πόλις Θάψακος ὀνόματι id. Xen.

ὄν. θεῖναί τινα to give one a name, Od.; but commonly in Mid., ὄν. θέσθαι id. Od., attic; and for Pass., ὄν. κεῖταί τινι Ar., etc.; ὄν. ἔχειν ἀπό τινος Hdt.

ὄνομα καλεῖν τινα to call one by name, Od., attic; so with pass. verbs. ὄν. ὠνομάζετο Ἕλενος Soph.; ὄν. κέκληται δημοκρατία Thuc.

name. fame, Ἰθάκης γε καὶ ἐς Τροίην ὄνομ᾽ ἵκει Od.; τὸ μέγα ὄν. τῶν Ἀθηνῶν Thuc.; ὄνομα or τὸ ὄν. ἔχειν to have a name for a thing (good or bad), 2 opt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NPN — Noun · nominative · plural · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Smith's Bible Dictionary

Names of places . --These may be divided into two general classes --descriptive and historical. The former are such as mark some peculiarity of the locality, usually a natural one, e.g. Sharon, "plain" Gibeah, "hill;" Pisgah. "height." Of the second class of local names, some were given in honor of individual men, e.g. the city Enoch (Genesis 4:17) etc. More commonly, however, such names were given to perpetuate that memory of some important historic occurrence. Bethel perpetuated through all Jewish history the early revelations of God to Jacob. (Genesis 28:19; 35:15) So Jehovah-jireh, (Genesis 22:14) Mahanaim, (Genesis 32:2) Peniel etc. In forming compounds to serve as…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Among the Hebrews were frequently significant; sometimes of a family trait, and sometimes of circumstances attending the birth of a child; often too they were assumed afterwards to commemorate some striking occurrence in one’s history. Compare the cases of Ishmael, Esau, and Jacob, Moses, Ichabod, etc., Ge 16:16 25:25,26 Ex 2:10 1Sa 4:21.

Compound names were frequent; and often a part of the name of God, JAH EL, JEHO, etc., was employed as in Eliezer, Ex 18:4, Amuel, Josiah, Adonijah. Sometimes a whole phrase was formed into a name; as Elioneai, to Jehovah are mine eyes, 1Ch 4:36. The New Testament names are chiefly…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
81%name
name81% · 187×named13% · 29×names6% · 13×other renderings1% · 2×

231 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial57%object21%subject20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 229 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐπίδιά
ἐν
ἔρχομαιI come, goπᾶςall, the whole, ὕδωρwater
τὶς
δέbut, on the otheἱερεύςa priestἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐκἐπάνωon the top, abov
ὅς
ἀνήρa male human beiἹεροσόλυμαPropΓαλιλαίαGalilee
ὄνομαnames229×
what comes after →
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἸησοῦςJesusἸωάννηςJohn
ἐγώ
ἐγώArticle theλέγωI say, speak
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pὅς
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
σῴζωI save, healὡσαννάHebrἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄνομα · 229× in the New Testament
Acts Revelation Luke John Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews Philippians 1 John James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 527 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 43Thebais201 BC–102 BC

τὸ … κέναι ἡμῖν τὴν ἵππον καὶ παρʼ Ἰουδαίου … σθαι αὐτήν, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα ἀγνοοῦμεν. αὐτοῦ δὲ μηδʼ ἀποδεδωκότος ἡμῖν μηδὲ ἵππον μηδὲ τὴν πορείαν αὐτῆς ἐπιδεδωκότος, ἐγράψαμέν

P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ Ἀμπέλιον

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … · τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
τῶνho of the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GPF — Article · genitive · plural · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
δώδεκαdōdeka twelve G1427 Adjective · nominative
75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means the number twelve, like the twelve apostles in Matthew 10:1. It is used to describe a dozen of something in the Bible.
Tyndale gloss
twelve
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δώδεκα, οἱ, αἱ, τά indecl.

numeral, twelve: Mt 9:20 10:1, al.; οἱ δ., the apostles, Mt 10:5, Mk 4:10, al.; in Ac 19:7 24:11, for Rec. δεκαδύο.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.

δῠώδεκα,

Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δώδεκα

dodeka

from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.

see GREEK for 1417

see GREEK for 1176

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δώδεκα

Indec.num.

twelve

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δώδεκα dōdeka 75x

twelve, Mt. 9:20; 10:1; οἱ δώδεκα, the twelve apostles, Mt. 26:14, 20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).

See APOSTLE; NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%twelve
twelve99% · 76×other renderings1% · 1×

77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject41%object31%adverbial12%predicate11%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἷςoneδέbut, on the otheμετά
ἔτοςa year
γάρforγίνομαιI come into beinὡςas, like as, how
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόἐπί
κλάσμαa fragment
Article theαἴρωI raise, lift up
πυλώνa large gate, a gate
ἔχωI have, hold, poδώδεκαIndec
δώδεκαtwelve75×
what comes after →
χιλιάςa thousand
ἐκσφραγίζωI set a seal upoArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπίἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐξίστημιI astonish, am a
Article the
λέγωI say, speakπαραβολήa parable, compaἐμβάπτωI dip into
φυλήa tribe, race
Article theκρίνωI judge, decide,υἱόςa son, descenden
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδώδεκα · 75× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Matthew Luke John Acts 1 Corinthians James
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 60c. AD 40

ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 43.2c. AD 96

ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 21Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 131

ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ

P.Harr. 2 190Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 138

Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .

O.Wilck. 2 192Elephantine oder SyeneAD 143

μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
φυλῶνphulē tribes G5443 Noun · genitive · plural · feminine
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A tribe or clan, like the tribes of Israel in Matthew 19:28 and Romans 11:1.
Amplified meaning
family groups, clans
Tyndale gloss
tribe
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φυλή (phulē) refers to a tribe or clan, often associated with kinship or local habitation. It encompasses the twelve tribes of Israel, as well as broader groups of people and nations. The New Testament uses it in contexts relating to the tribes of Israel (e.g., Matthew 19:28) and the nations of the earth. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meaning.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φυλή, ῆς, ἡ

[in LXX chiefly for; מַטֶּה, also for שֵׁבֶט, מִשְׁפָּחָה, etc. ;]

a body of men united by kinship or habitation, a clan or tribe: of the tribes of Israel, Mt 19:28, Lk 2:36 22:30, Ac 13:21, Ro 11:1, Phl 3:5, He 7:13, 14, Ja 1:1, Re 5:5 7:4-8 21:12; of the tribes of the earth, the peoples and nations, Mt 24:30, Re 1:7 5:9 7:9 11:9 13:7 14:6.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φυλή, -ῆς, ἡ, (fr. φύω), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down ; aL a tribe; in the N.T. all the persons descended from one of the twelve sons of the patriarch Jacob (Sept. for 792 and viv; also for NMSwWN, see πατριά, 2): Heb. vii. 13 sq-; with the addition of the genitives ᾿Ασήρ, Βενιαμίν, ete., Lk. ii. 36; Acts xiii. 21; Ro. χὶ. 1 ; Phil. iii. 5; Rev. νυ. 5; vii. 5-8; δώδεκα φ. τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Jas.i. 1; Rev. xxi. 12; [πᾶσα φυλὴ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ, Rev. vii. 4]. 2. a race, nation, people: Mt. xxiv. 30; Rev. [i. 7]; v.9; vii. 9; [xi.9]; xiii. 7; xiv. 6.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φυλή, “‘a tribe,” especially one of the twelve tribes of Israel (Mt τοῦ a/.), and extended by analogy to the tribes of the earth (Mt 24%° a/.). For the priestly tribes in Egypt, cf. P Tebt II. 2998 (c. A.D. 50), where a certain Psoiphis, τῶν ἀ[πὸ THs κώ]μης πέμπτη[ς φυλῆς] ἱερέος (1. ἱερέως) τῶν ἐν [τῇ κώμῃ] θεῶν, ““ priest of the fifth tribe of the gods at the village,” asks that the birth of a son be registered, P Kyl Il. 179° (A.D. 127) Πακῦσις . . . ἱερεὺς πρώτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου, and similarly %*7, See further Otto Priester i. p. 23 ff. In Claudius’s address to the Alexandrines P Lond 19124! (A.D. 41) a φυλὴ Κλαυδιανά, not known elsewhere, is mentioned : see the editor’s note, where reference is made to Schubart Archiv v. p. 94f. for the Alexandrian tribenames of the Roman period. Cf. also Preisigke Fachworter 5.U.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φυλή (phulē) — tribe.

φῡλή, ἡ,

(φύω) properly, like{φῦλον}, a race, tribe; but accusative to [Refs 4th c.BC+] a union formed in an organized community (whether πόλις or ἔθνος): hence, tribe, i.e.

I. a body of men united

I.1. by supposed ties of blood and descent, clan, such as the three Dorian tribes, Rhetra cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the four Ionic tribes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Laconian, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the old Roman, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; of the Persian, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the Jewish, [LXX] (but also of subdivisions of the tribe (σκῆπτρον),[LXX+NT]

I.2. by local habitation, such as the ten local tribes at Athens formed by Cleisthenes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or those formed by Servius at Rome, φ. τοπικαί, opposed to γενικαί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.3. subdivision of the priests in each Egyptian temple, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

φυλή

phule

from 5453 (compare 5444); an offshoot, i.e. race or clan:--kindred,

tribe.

see GREEK for 5453

see GREEK for 5444

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φυλή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

a tribe, race

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φυλή phylē 31x

a tribe, Mt. 19:28; 24:30; Lk. 2:36; a people, nation, Rev. 1:7; 5:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φυλή φυ_λή, ἡ, φύω like φῦλον, a race or tribe of men, κατὰ φυλάς Xen.

a body of men united by ties of blood and descent, a clan, such as those among the Dorians (φ. γενική), Pind.; of the four old Attic Tribes, Hdt., Eur.; of the Jewish, NTest.

a tribe connected by local habitation, like our hundred or county, such as the ten local tribes at Athens formed by Cleisthenes (φ. τοπική), Hdt., etc.—The subdivisions of the φυλαὶ γενικαί were φρατρίαι, those of the φυλαὶ τοπικαί were δῆμοι.

the contingent of soldiers furnished by a tribe, Hdt., Thuc., etc.:—later, a brigade of cavalry, Xen.; cf. φύλαρχος II.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPF — Noun · genitive · plural · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%tribe
tribe71% · 22×tribes26% · 8×a tribe3% · 1×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial55%subject19%object16%predicate7%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐκ
χιλιάςa thousandΦανουήλPropἀνήρa male human bei
δώδεκαIndec
Article the
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐκ
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἐκἐπί
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔθνοςa race, people, λαόςa people, the cr
φυλήtribes31×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
γλῶσσαthe tongue, a laλαόςa people, the cr
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,ἸσραήλPropἐν
ΒενιαμίνProp
ἔτοςa yearἙβραῖοςa HebrewδώδεκαIndec
ἈσήρProp
οὗτοςδώδεκαIndec
ἸούδαςJudah, Judas, Jude
Article theδώδεκαIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφυλή · 31× in the New Testament
Revelation Hebrews Luke Matthew Acts James Philippians Romans
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 185 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.94c. AD 40

„Δὰν κρινεῖ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ λαόν, ὡσεὶ καὶ μία φυλὴ Ἰσραήλ, καὶ γενέσθω Δὰν ὄφις ἐφ’ ὁδοῦ, ἐγκαθήμενος ἐπὶ τρίβου, δάκνων πτέρναν ἵππου, καὶ πεσεῖται ὁ ἱππεὺς εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, τὴν σωτηρίαν περιμένων κυρίου“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.221c. AD 75–95

εἰσὶ δὲ οὗτοι, οἳ τὸ τῶν Ἀράβων ἔθνος καὶ τὰς φυλὰς ἀπʼ αὐτῶν καλοῦσι διά τε τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν καὶ τὸ Ἁβράμου ἀξίωμα.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 8.3c. AD 100

οἱ ῥαντίζοντες παῖδες οἱ εὐαγγελισάμενοι ἡμῖν τὴν ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ τὸν ἁγνισμὸν τῆς καρδίας, οἷς ἔδωκεν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τὴν ἐξουσίαν ʽοὖσιν δεκάδυο εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν φυλῶν ὅτι δεκάδυο φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰσραήλ̓, εἰς τὸ κηρύσσειν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Amh. 2 112Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 128

τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Πακῦσις Στοτοήτεως πρεσβυτέρου τοῦ Πανεφρίμεως ἱερεὺς πρώτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγάλου ὡς ἐτῶν μα οὐλὴ βραχίωνι ἀριστερῶι τῷ ἑαυτοῦ ὁμοπατρίωι καὶ

P.Amh. 2 74Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 147

κωμογραμματεῖ Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου παρὰ Πανεφρέμμεως Ἀγχώφεως πρεσβυτέρου Πανεφρέμμεως μητρὸς Στοτοήτεως τῆς Ὥρου ἱερέως τρίτης φυλῆς ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. ἀπογράφομαι ἐμαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς εἰς τὴν τοῦ διεληλυθότος

P.Amh. 2 113Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 157

τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Στοτοῆτις πρεσβύτερος Στοτοήτεως τοῦ Στοτοήτεως ἱερεὺς τετάρτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου ὡς ἐτῶν ξδ οὐλὴ μετόπῳ μέσῳ Ἐρειεῦτι Πανεφρέμμεως τοῦ Στοτοήτεως ἱερείᾳ

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
τῶνho of the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GPM — Article · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
υἱῶνuhios of [the] sons G5207 Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
376× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Revelation than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, this word means a son or child, used in passages like Matthew 10:37 and Luke 1:13. It can also refer to animals, as in a foal. The word is used to describe family relationships and is an important concept in biblical genealogy.
Tyndale gloss
son
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word υἱός (i.e., *huios*) means 'son' and is used broadly to refer to biological offspring, descendants, or figuratively to denote kinship. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including titles for Jesus, such as 'Son of God' and 'Son of Man', as well as in expressions of spiritual relationships, like 'sons of God' referring to believers. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

υἱός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX very freq. and nearly always for בֵּן, Ge 4:17, al.; for בַּר, Da LXX TH 7:13, al.; etc. ;],

a son;

in the ordinary sense: Mt 10:37, Mk 9:17, Lk 1:13, al. mult.; omitted with the art. of origin (WM, § 30, 3; Bl., §35, 2), τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, Ac 13:22 (LXX); also c. gen. anarth. (cl.), Σώπατρος Πύρρου Βεροιαῖος, Ac 20:4; c. adj., προτότοκος, Lk 2:7; μονογένης, Lk 7:12; opp. to νόθος, Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

υἱός (uhios) — son.

υἱός, ὁ

(written ϝηιός in Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. [Refs 6th c.BC+] —in earlier _Attic dialect_ and other Inscrr. inflected as a ῠ-stem (like πῆχυς), _nominative_ υἱύς (written huihus)[Refs]; dative υἱεῖ: dual υἱεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+], written ηυιε in [Refs 5th c.BC+] are rejected by [Refs 2nd c.AD+], Thom.Mag.p.367 R., as not Attic dialect, though the two latter forms are used by later writers (as υἱέα [Refs 3rd c.BC+] is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is mentioned as a form that would be regular by [Refs] —Homer uses _nominative_ υἱός (very frequently); genitive υἱοῦ only in [Refs 8th c.BC+], elsewhere υἱέο; dative υἱέϊ or υἱε; accusative υἱέα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: plural, nominative υἱέες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative υἱοῖσι (ν) only [Refs 8th c.BC+], belongs solely to later Epic dialect poets, as [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (υιυις lapis); accusative υἱύν [Refs]; genitive υἱέος [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

υἱός

huios

apparently a primary word; a "son" (sometimes of animals), used very

widely of immediate, remote or figuratively, kinship:--child, foal,

son.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

υἱός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a son, descendent

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

υἱός hyios 377x

a son, Mt. 1:21, 25; 7:9; 13:55 freq.; a legitimate son, Heb. 12:8; a son artificially constituted, Acts 7:21; Heb. 11:24; a descendant, Mt. 1:1, 20; Mk. 12:35; in NT the young of an animal, Mt. 21:5; a spiritual son in respect of conversion or discipleship, 1 Pet. 5:13; from the Hebrew, a disciple, perhaps, Mt. 12:27; a son as implying connection in respect of membership, service…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

υἱός υἱός, οῦ, ὁ, etc. A son, Lat. filius, Hom., etc.; υἱὸν ποιεῖσθαί τινα to adopt him as a son, Aeschin.; υἱεῖς ἄνδρες grown up sons, Dem.:—rarely of animals, NTest.

periphr., υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, for Ἀχαιοί, Il.; cf. παῖς.

Hom. sometimes makes the 1st syll. short, as if it were ὑός.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
80%son
son80% · 307×sons19% · 71×other renderings1% · 4×

382 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject35%predicate25%object20%adverbial15%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 376 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,ὁράωI see, look upon
εἰμίI am, exist
θεόςGod, a godὅςαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτίκτωI bear, bring foεἰCond
εἰCond
αὐτόςσεαυτοῦδιάβολοςslanderous, the
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becποιέωI do, makeκαίand, even, also,
υἱόςof [the] sons376×
what comes after →
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a godνυμφώνa bridal chamber
αὐτός
Article theἸησοῦςJesusεἰμίI am, exist
ἐγώ
Article theεἰμίI am, existεἷςone
καίand, even, also, nam
καλέωI call, invite, Article theὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theθεόςGod, a godλέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceυἱός · 376× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Mark Hebrews 1 John Acts Galatians Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament20 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.48c. AD 40

„ἐὰν δὲ γένωνται ἀνθρώπῳ δύο γυναῖκες, μία αὐτῶν ἠγαπημένη καὶ μία αὐτῶν μισουμένη, καὶ τέκωσιν αὐτῷ καὶ γένηται υἱὸς πρωτότοκος τῆς μισουμένης, ...

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.63c. AD 75–95

Ἀνώχου δὲ Ἰαράδης υἱὸς ἦν, ἐκ δὲ τούτου Μαρουῆλος, οὗ γίνεται παῖς Μαθουσάλας, τοῦ δὲ Λάμεχος, ᾧ παῖδες ὑπῆρξαν ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ἐκ δύο γυναικῶν αὐτῷ φύντες Σελλᾶς καὶ Ἄδας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Adl. 12Pathyris102 BC

τρεῖς · γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων, τὴν δʼ ἄλλην

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

, ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων, τὴν δʼ ἄλλην

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

νότου γῆ Πατήφιος τοῦ Πεμσάϊος βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος ἧς κρατοῦσιν οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου

having then a wall great and high, having gates twelve and at the gates angels twelve, and names inscribed, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the of [the] sons of Israel;
Ἰσραήλ·Israēl of Israel; G2474 Noun · proper name, indeclinable
68× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Refers to Israel, the adopted name of Jacob, including his descendants, as seen in Matthew 2:6 and Acts 7:42.
Amplified meaning
God's chosen people, the descendants of Jacob
Tyndale gloss
Israel
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἰσραήλ (i.e., *Israēl*) refers to Israel, the name given to Jacob and his descendants. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to the house, people, and tribes of Israel, as well as metaphorically for Christians. The term is indeclinable and has a range of meanings related to the Jewish nation and its heritage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἰσραήλ (FlJ, Ἰσράηλος, -ου), ὁ, indecl. (Heb. יִשְׂרָאֵל, Ge 32:28),

Israel: ὁ οἶκος Ἰ., Ac 7:42(LXX), al.; λαός, Ac 4:10; υἱοί, Ac 5:21, al.; αἱ φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰ., Mt 19:28, al. By meton., for the Israelites, Mt 2:6, Lk 1:54, Ro 11:2, al.; ὁ λαὸς Ἰ., Ac 4:10; γῆ Ἰ., Mt 2:20, 21; βασιλεὺς Ἰ., Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Ἰσραήλ (Joseph. Ἰσράηλος, -ov), 6, indecl., Osi, fr. by and wv, wrestler with God, Gen. xxxii. 28; Hos. xii. 4, cf. Gen. xxxy. 10), Israel, a name given to the patriarch Jacob (and borne by him in addition to his former name from Gen. xxxii. 28 on): ὁ οἶκος Ἰσραήλ, the family or descendants of Israel, the race of Israel [A. V. the house of Israel], Mt. x.6; xv. 24; Acts vii. 42, (Ex. xvi. 31; 1S. vii. 2, and often) ; of υἱοὶ Ἰσρ. the [sons i. 6. the children, the] posterity of Israel, Lk. i. 16; Acts v. 21; vii. 23,37; Ro. ix. 27; ai φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἴσρ., Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. vii.4. | By meton. for the posterity of Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because it made reference to the promises of salvation through the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see Ἰουδαῖος, b.]): Mt. ii. 6; vili.10; ix.33; Lk.i. 54…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἰσραήλ (Israēl) — Israel.

Ἰσραήλ (FlJ, Ἰσράηλος, -ου), ὁ indecl. (Heb. יִשְׂרָאֵל, Gen.32:28),

Israel: ὁ οἶκος Ἰ., Act.7:42 (LXX), al.; λαός, Act.4:10; υὁοί, Act.5:21, al.; αἱ φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰ., Mat.19:28, al. By meton., for the Israelites, Mat.2:6, Luk.1:54, Rom.11:2, al.; ὁ λαὸς Ἰ., Act.4:10; γῆ Ἰ., Mat.2:20-21

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἰσραήλ

Israel

of Hebrew origin (3478); Israel (i.e. Jisrael), the adopted name of

Jacob, including his descendants (literally or figuratively):--Israel.

see HEBREW for 03478

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἰσραήλ, ὁ

Prop.n.

Israel

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἰσραήλ Israēl 68x

Israel, pr. name, indecl.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinable
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

iz'-ra-el.

See JACOB.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Israel

The name conferred on Jacob after the great prayer-struggle at Peniel (Gen. 32:28), because “as a prince he had power with God and prevailed.” (See JACOB.) This is the common name given to Jacob’s descendants. The whole people of the twelve tribes are called “Israelites,” the “children of Israel” (Josh. 3:17; 7:25; Judg. 8:27; Jer. 3:21), and the “house of Israel” (Ex. 16:31; 40:38).

This name Israel is sometimes used emphatically for the true Israel (Ps. 73:1: Isa. 45:17; 49:3;

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(the prince that prevails with God). The name given, (Genesis 32:28) to Jacob after his wrestling with the angel, (Hosea 12:4) at Peniel. Gesenius interprets Israel "soldier of God." It became the national name of the twelve tribes collectively. They are so called in (Exodus 3:16) and afterward. It is used in a narrower sense, excluding Judah, in (1 Samuel 11:8; 2 Samuel 20:1; 1 Kings 12:16) Thenceforth it was assumed and accepted as the name of the northern kingdom. After the Babylonian captivity, the returned exiles resumed the name Israel as the designation of…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Who prevails with God, a name given to Jacob, after having wrestled with the Angel-Jehovah at Penuel. Ge 32:1,2,28,30 Ho 12:3. See JACOB. By the name Israel is sometimes understood all the posterity of Israel, the seed of Jacob, 1Co 10:18; sometimes all true believers, his spiritual seed, Ro 9:6; and sometimes the kingdom of Israel, or the ten tribes, as distinct from the kingdom of Judah.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%israel
israel93% · 64×israel?3% · 2×other renderings4% · 3×

69 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial38%object19%subject18%predicate12%indirect object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 68 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐγώπόλιςa city
υἱόςa son, descendent
Article theφυλήa tribe, raceἀπό
οἶκοςa house, household
ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
λαόςa people, the crowd
Article theκαίand, even, also,
γῆthe earth, soil, lan
εἰς
Ἰσραήλof Israel;68×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
πνεῦμαwind, breath, spεἰςοὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, because
ἐπισκέπτομαιI look upon, visκαίand, even, also,ἐν
Article the
ἅλυσιςa light chainθεόςGod, a god
οὗτος
ἸσραήλPropοὐNeg
εἰς
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἸσραήλ · 68× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew Romans John Hebrews Revelation 2 Corinthians Mark 1 Corinthians Ephesians Galatians
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,204 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.34c. AD 40

οὐκ ἀφήσει δὲ ὁ θεὸς τὸν τοῦ ὁρῶντος ἔγγονον Ἰσραὴλ οὕτως τραπῆναι, ὥστε πληγῆναι ὑπὸ τῆς τροπῆς, ἀλλὰ ἀναδραμεῖν καὶ ἀνακῦψαι ὥσπερ ἐκ βυθοῦ καὶ ἀνασωθῆναι βιάσεται.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.14c. AD 100

ἔτι δὲ κἀκεῖνο, ἀδελφοί μου, νοεῖτε: ὅταν βλέπετε μετὰ τηλικαῦτα σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γεγονότα ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ, καὶ οὕτως ἐγκαταλελεῖφθαι αὐτούς: προσέχωμεν, μήποτε, ὡς γέγραπται, πολλοὶ κλητοί, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεκτοὶ εὑρεθῶμεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 4.13c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλος Δαυεὶδ φθόνον ἔσχεν οὐ μόνον ὑπὸ τῶν ἀλλοφύλων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὑπὸ Σαοὺλ βασιλέως Ἰσραὴλ ἐδιώχθη.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD
ZPE 205 (2018), p. 127-142Fundort: Kellis (Oasis MagnaAD 301–AD 400

ἀνθρώπωι καὶ γεννητὸς ἐσταυρωμένος ἀγέννητος δὲ καὶ ὡς ἔστιν ἐν οἰκίᾳ Ἰουδᾶ ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ - ἐν γὰρ Κέλλει ἦν καὶ ὁ ποταμός -, καὶ ὅτι ἐν τῷ ἔθνει

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate